Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type),

AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series

Handbook

(Network Modules)

Mar. 2016 Edition

 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before using this product.)

Before using this product, please read this handbook and the relevant manuals introduced in this handbook
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.

In this handbook, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " WARNING" and " CAUTION".

WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to
serious consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.

Make sure that the end users read this handbook and then keep the handbook in a safe place for future
reference.

A-1
[Design Precautions]
WARNING
● For the operating status of each station after a communication failure in the data link or the network,
refer to the following manuals.
Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
• Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
• Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O network)
• Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Remote I/O Module Reference Manual (MELSECNET/10
Mode)
• MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B Local Station Data Link Module User's Manual
• CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
● If a coaxial cable is disconnected, the network may be unstable, resulting in a communication failure
of multiple stations. Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will
always operate safely even if communications fail. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to
an incorrect output or malfunction.
● When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting a personal computer with an
intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller, configure an
interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely.
For other forms of control (such as program modification or operating status change) of a running
programmable controller, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe
before proceeding. Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external
device, immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to
a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine
corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a
communication failure.
● Do not write any data to the "system area" of the buffer memory in each intelligent function module.
Do not write any data to the "system area" of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module.
Also, do not use any "use prohibited" signals as an output signal from the CPU module to the
intelligent function module. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.
● To set the auto refresh parameter, select the device Y for the remote output (RY) refresh device.
If a device other than Y is selected, the CPU module holds the device status even after its status is
changed to STOP. For how to stop data link, refer to the following manual.
• CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
● If a CC-Link dedicated cable is disconnected, the network may be unstable, resulting in a
communication failure of multiple stations. Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure
that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail.
Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

A-2
 CAUTION
● After changing the parameter of the CPU module or the remote I/O module, reset the CPU module.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction, since the previous parameter setting remains in the module.
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction
due to noise.

A-3
[Installation Precautions]
WARNING
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing a
module.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.

CAUTION
● Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the
user’s manual for the CPU module used.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the
product.
● To mount a Q series module, while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of
the module, fully insert the module fixing projection(s) into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the
module until it snaps into place.
Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure or drop of the module.
When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module
with a screw.
Tighten the screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
● To mount an A/AnS/QnA/QnAS module, fully insert the module fixing projection(s) located in the
lower part of the module into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into
place (To fix an AnS series module to the base unit, tighten the screws within the specified torque
range).
Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure or drop of the module.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the
module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
● A MELSECNET/H module with function version D or later can be replaced online (while power is on)
on any remote I/O station. Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced
online, and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to the relevant section in the following.
• Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O network)
● Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module.
Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.

A-4
[Wiring Precautions]
WARNING
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.
● After installation and wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for
operation.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

CAUTION
● Ground the FG terminal to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable
controller. Failure to do so may result in malfunction.
● Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring the external power supply terminal block,
and connect the cables correctly.
Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or
failure.
● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade
solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting
in failure.
● Correctly solder coaxial cable connectors. Incomplete soldering may result in malfunction.
● Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables.
Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.
● Place the cables in a duct or clamp them.
If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage to the module or
cables or malfunction due to poor contact.
● Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, fire, or
malfunction.
● When disconnecting the cable from the module, do not pull the cable by the cable part.
For the cable with connector, hold the connector part of the cable.
For the cable connected to the terminal block, loosen the terminal block screws.
Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction and damage to the module or
cable.

A-5
[Wiring Precautions]
CAUTION
● Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels.
Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay
terminal block.
Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance
personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock. For wiring methods, refer to the
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).
● Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.

● A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not remove the film during wiring.
Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation.
● Use CC-Link dedicated cables for the CC-Link system. If not, the performance of the CC-Link
system is not guaranteed.
For the maximum station-to-station distance and the overall cable distance, follow the specifications
in the following.
If not, normal data transmission will not be guaranteed.
• CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

WARNING
● Do not touch any terminal while power is on.
Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before cleaning the module or
retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws. Failure to do so may result in electric
shock.

A-6
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
CAUTION
● Before performing online operations (especially, program modification, forced output, and operating
status change) for the running CPU module on another station from GX Developer over the
MELSECNET/H network, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety.
Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
● Do not disassemble or modify the modules.
Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire.
● Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone
System) more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
● Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing a
module. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A MELSECNET/H module with function version D or later can be replaced online (while power is on)
on any remote I/O station.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure. For details, refer to the relevant section in the following
manual.
• Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O network)
● Do not touch any terminal while power is on.
Doing so will cause malfunction.
● Tighten the module fixing screw and the terminal screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire, short circuit, or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
● After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit, and the
terminal block to/from the module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively.
Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.
● Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from
the human body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.

[Disposal Precautions]
CAUTION
● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

A-7
 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major
or serious accident; and
ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of
the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general
industries.
MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR
LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR
USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS,
OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY
MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
• Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any
other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
• Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of
a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
• Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as
Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation,
Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or
Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a
significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the
PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT
is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no
special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general
specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi
representative in your region.

A-8
REVISIONS

* The handbook number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Handbook Number Revision
Apr. 2005 L(NA)08048ENG-A First edition
Oct. 2005 L(NA)08048ENG-B Addition
Section 1.1.3, Section 2.5.3, Section 2.5.4, Appendix 1
Partial correction
Contents, Section 2.5.2, Section 2.7, Section 3.5.2, Appendix 1Appendix 2
Oct. 2006 L(NA)08048ENG-C Addition
Chapter 6
Partial correction
Section 1.3, Chapter 6Chapter 7, Chapter 7Chapter 8
Jul. 2007 L(NA)08048ENG-D Addition
Section 1.1.4, Chapter 7
Partial correction
Section 1.1.3, Chapter 7Chapter 8, Chapter 8Chapter 9
Nov. 2012 L(NA)08048ENG-E Revision on the new functions of the Universal model QCPU with a serial number
(first five digits) of "13102" or later
Model Addition
QJ71NT11B, MELSEC-AnS/QnAS series, QA1S51B, 5C-FB
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Chapter 1 to 9, Appendix
Mar. 2016 L(NA)08048ENG-F Addition
Section 5.2
Change
Chapter 9 Appendix 1, Appendix 1 Appendix 2, Appendix 2  Appendix 3
Partial correction
Cover, Section 1.1, 1.1.3, 1.2, 2.6.2, 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6.2, 5.1, 7.4, Appendix
3.4, WARRANTY

Japanese Handbook Version L-08047-N

This handbook confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may
occur as a result of using the contents noted in this handbook.

© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A-9
 CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................................A - 1

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT .................................................................................................A - 8
REVISIONS ......................................................................................................................................................A - 9
CONTENTS ...................................................................................................................................................A - 10
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................................................................A - 15

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 - 1 to 1 - 30
1.1 Transition from MELSECNET (II) and /B to MELSECNET/H ........................................................... 1 - 1
1.1.1 Transition to the Q series .......................................................................................................... 1 - 1
1.1.2 Transition procedure to a Q series MELSECNET/H system .................................................. 1 - 13
1.1.3 Transition to and addition of QCPU by utilizing existing network MELSECNET (II) and /B .... 1 - 16
1.1.4 Replacement selection points ................................................................................................. 1 - 19
1.2 Replacement of the MELSECNET/10 for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS Series with the MELSECNET/H for
Q Series ......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 26
1.3 Replacing the CC-Link for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS Series with the CC-Link for Q Series ..................... 1 - 30

CHAPTER 2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2 - 1 to 2 - 75
2.1 List of MELSECNET (II) and /B Alternative Models ......................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2 Performance Specifications Comparisons ....................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.2.1 Module performance comparisons ........................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.2.2 Cable performance comparisons .............................................................................................. 2 - 7
2.3 Functional Comparisons ................................................................................................................ 2 - 10
2.4 Switch Settings Comparisons ........................................................................................................ 2 - 11
2.5 Parameter Comparisons ................................................................................................................ 2 - 12
2.5.1 Parameter comparisons .......................................................................................................... 2 - 12
2.5.2 Example of changing parameters on 2-tier system ................................................................ 2 - 13
2.5.3 Example of changing parameters on 3-tier system (When only the first half of link parameter
is set) ...................................................................................................................................... 2 - 27
2.5.4 Example of changing parameters on 3-tier system (When the first half/second half of link
parameter is set) ..................................................................................................................... 2 - 43
2.6 Program Comparisons ................................................................................................................... 2 - 63
2.6.1 Comparison of special relays M (SB) and special registers D (SW) ....................................... 2 - 63
2.6.2 Transient instructions .............................................................................................................. 2 - 70
2.7 Replacement Precautions .............................................................................................................. 2 - 72

CHAPTER 3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3 - 1 to 3 - 29
3.1 List of MELSECNET (II) and /B Alternative Models ......................................................................... 3 - 1
3.2 Performance Specifications Comparisons ....................................................................................... 3 - 3

A - 10
 3.2.1 Module performance Compatibility comparisons ...................................................................... 3 - 3
3.2.2 Cable performance comparisons .............................................................................................. 3 - 8
3.3 Functional Comparisons ................................................................................................................ 3 - 10
3.4 Switch Settings Comparisons ........................................................................................................ 3 - 11
3.5 Parameter Comparisons ................................................................................................................ 3 - 12
3.5.1 Parameter comparisons ......................................................................................................... 3 - 12
3.5.2 Parameter change example ................................................................................................... 3 - 13
3.6 Program Comparisons ................................................................................................................... 3 - 23
3.6.1 Comparison of special relays M (SB) and special registers D (SW) ...................................... 3 - 23
3.6.2 Transient instructions ............................................................................................................. 3 - 27
3.7 Replacement Precautions .............................................................................................................. 3 - 28

CHAPTER 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4 - 1 to 4 - 24
4.1 List of MELSECNET/10 Alternative Models ..................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.2 Performance Specifications Comparisons ....................................................................................... 4 - 2
4.2.1 Module performance comparisons incompatible ...................................................................... 4 - 2
4.2.2 Cable performance comparisons .............................................................................................. 4 - 8
4.3 Functional Comparisons ................................................................................................................ 4 - 10
4.4 Switch Settings Comparisons ........................................................................................................ 4 - 13
4.5 Parameter Comparisons ................................................................................................................ 4 - 14
4.6 Program Comparisons ................................................................................................................... 4 - 17
4.6.1 Comparison of link special relay (SB)/link special register (SW) ............................................ 4 - 17
4.6.2 Comparison of dedicated instructions .................................................................................... 4 - 20
4.7 Other Precautions .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 24

CHAPTER 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5 - 1 to 5 - 47
5.1 Replacing MELSECNET/10 with MELSECNET/H ........................................................................... 5 - 1
5.1.1 List of MELSECNET/10 alternative models .............................................................................. 5 - 1
5.1.2 Performance specifications comparisons ................................................................................. 5 - 3
5.1.3 Functional Comparisons ......................................................................................................... 5 - 18
5.1.4 Switch setting comparisons .................................................................................................... 5 - 22
5.1.5 Parameter comparisons ......................................................................................................... 5 - 24
5.1.6 Program comparisons ............................................................................................................ 5 - 29
5.1.7 Comparison of dedicated instruction ...................................................................................... 5 - 30
5.1.8 Other precautions ................................................................................................................... 5 - 35
5.2 Gradually replacing A series remote I/O stations with Q series remote I/O stations ..................... 5 - 36
5.2.1 List of MELSECNET/10 modules and the alternative modules .............................................. 5 - 36
5.2.2 Module performance specifications comparisons ................................................................... 5 - 38
5.2.3 Functional comparisons .......................................................................................................... 5 - 41
5.2.4 Switch setting comparisons .................................................................................................... 5 - 42
5.2.5 Parameter comparisons ......................................................................................................... 5 - 43
5.2.6 Program comparisons ............................................................................................................ 5 - 44

A - 11
 5.2.7 Last stage of the replacement ................................................................................................ 5 - 47

CHAPTER 6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A

GATEWAY STATION 6 - 1 to 6 - 15
6.1 Application of Gateway Station Using Gateway Set ........................................................................ 6 - 1
6.2 List of Gateway Set Models ............................................................................................................. 6 - 3
6.3 Precautions for Use of Gateway Set ................................................................................................ 6 - 4
6.4 Communication Between Existing ACPU in MELSECNET(II) and Added QCPU
(Data Transmission/Reception by Inter-link Data Transfer) ............................................................. 6 - 5
6.5 Communication Between Existing ACPU in MELSECNET(II) and Added QCPU Using Gateway Set
(Data Transmission/Reception by Sequence Program) ................................................................. 6 - 10

CHAPTER 7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE

LOCAL STATION 7 - 1 to 7 - 14
7.1 Application that Connects the QCPU as the Local Station .............................................................. 7 - 1
7.2 List of Local Station Data Link Module ............................................................................................ 7 - 3
7.3 Precautions for Using Local Station Data Link Module .................................................................... 7 - 3
7.4 Network Parameter .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 4

CHAPTER 8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK 8 - 1 to 8 - 27

8.1 List of CC-Link Alternative Models ................................................................................................... 8 - 1
8.2 Performance Specifications Comparisons ....................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.2.1 Module performance comparisons ........................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.2.2 Cable performance comparisons .............................................................................................. 8 - 4
8.3 Functional Comparisons .................................................................................................................. 8 - 5
8.4 Switch Settings Comparisons .......................................................................................................... 8 - 9
8.5 Parameter Comparisons ................................................................................................................ 8 - 11
8.6 Program Comparisons ................................................................................................................... 8 - 12
8.6.1 Comparison of I/O signals ...................................................................................................... 8 - 12
8.6.2 Buffer memory comparisons ................................................................................................... 8 - 16
8.6.3 Comparison of link special relay (SB)/link special register (SW) ............................................ 8 - 18
8.7 Other Precautions .......................................................................................................................... 8 - 24
8.8 Parameter Setting Example ........................................................................................................... 8 - 25
8.8.1 Parameter setting example on the A/AnS series .................................................................... 8 - 25
8.8.2 Parameter setting example on the Q series ........................................................................... 8 - 27

APPENDICES App - 1 to App - 5

Appendix 1 External Dimensions ..........................................................................................................App - 1
Appendix 2 Spare parts storage ...........................................................................................................App - 1
Appendix 3 Related Manuals ................................................................................................................App - 3
Appendix 3.1 Replacement handbooks ............................................................................................App - 3

A - 12
Appendix 3.2 A/AnS series ............................................................................................................... App - 4
Appendix 3.3 QnA/QnAS series .......................................................................................................App - 4
Appendix 3.4 Q series ......................................................................................................................App - 4

A - 13
 ● For the products shown in handbooks for transition, catalogues, and transition examples, refer to the
manuals for the relevant products and check the detailed specifications, precautions for use, and
restrictions before replacement.
For the products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd., Mitsubishi Electric
System & Service Co., Ltd., and other companies, refer to the catalogue for each product and check
the detailed specifications, precautions for use, and restrictions before use.
The manuals and catalogues for our products, products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric
Engineering Co., Ltd., and Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd. are shown in Appendix of
each handbook for transition.

● Products shown in this handbook are subject to change without notice.

A - 14
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Unless otherwise specified, this handbook uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.

Generic term/abbreviation Description

Series
A series Abbreviation for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-A series programmable controllers
AnS series Abbreviation for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-A series programmable controllers
A/AnS series Generic term for A series and AnS series
QnA series Abbreviation for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-QnA series programmable controllers
QnAS series Abbreviation for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-QnA series programmable controllers
QnA/QnAS series Generic term for QnA series and QnAS series
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Generic term for A series, AnS series, QnA series, and QnAS series
Q series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC-Q series programmable controllers
CPU module type
CPU module Generic term for A series, AnS series, QnA series, QnAS series, and Q series CPU modules
Basic model QCPU Generic term for the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, and Q01CPU
High Performance model
Generic term for the Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU
QCPU
Process CPU Generic term for the Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, and Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU
Generic term for the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU,
Q03UDVCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Universal model QCPU Q06UDVCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q13UDVCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q26UDVCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, and Q100UDEHCPU
CPU module model
ACPU Generic term for MELSEC-A series programmable controller CPUs
AnSCPU Generic term for MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller CPUs
A/AnSCPU Generic term for MELSEC-A series and MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller CPUs
Generic term for the A1NCPU, A1NCPUP21/R21, A1NCPUP21-S3, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1,
AnNCPU A2NCPUP21/R21, A2NCPUP21/R21-S1, A2NCPUP21-S3(S4), A3NCPU, A3NCPUP21/R21,
and A3NCPUP21-S3
Generic term for the A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A3ACPU, A2ACPUP21/R21, A2ACPUP21/R21-
AnACPU
S1, and A3ACPUP21/R21
Generic term for the A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU, A4UCPU, A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1,
AnUCPU
and A2USHCPU-S1
AnN/AnACPU Generic term for the AnNCPU and AnACPU
AnN/AnA/AnSCPU Generic term for the AnNCPU, AnACPU, and AnSCPU
QnACPU Generic term for MELSEC-QnA series programmable controller CPUs
QnASCPU Generic term for MELSEC-QnAS series programmable controller CPUs
Generic term for MELSEC-QnA series and MELSEC-QnAS series programmable controller
QnA/QnASCPU
CPUs
Generic term for A series, AnS series, QnA series, and QnAS series programmable controller
A/AnS/QnA/QnASCPU
CPUs
QCPU Generic term for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller CPUs

A - 15
 [About symbols used in figures]
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H

M m Master station L l Local station MP Control station NS Normal station

R r Remote I/O station MR Remote master station R Remote I/O station

 stands for the station No.  stands for the network No., and
 stands for the station No.

A - 16
1 INTRODUCTION

1 INTRODUCTION
1

1.1 Transition from MELSECNET (II) and /B to MELSECNET/H

1.1.1 Transition to the Q series

To replace the MELSECNET (II) and /B system with the Q series, the following methods can be used:
• Replace with the MELSECNET/H system
• Keep the existing MELSECNET(II) network and replace some of the systems with the QCPU. Or add
the QCPU.

For replacement with the MELSECNET/10(H), refer to Section 1.1.2. For replacement with the Q series
or add the Q series with the existing MELSECNET(II), refer to Section 1.1.3.

The following shows the configuration of the Q series MELSECNET/H system after the transition and
the system configuration precautions at transition for each of the MELSECNET (II) and /B system
configurations.
For details, refer to CHAPTER 2 and CHAPTER 3.

1-1
1 INTRODUCTION

Network type 2-tier/3-tier Component stations Refer to

Local station only Section 1.1.1 (1) (a)
2-tier system Remote I/O station only Section 1.1.1 (1) (b)
Mixture of local station and remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (1) (c)
Optical loop
Local station only Section 1.1.1 (1) (d)
3-tier system 2-tier local station, 3-tier remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (1) (e)
Mixture of local station and remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (1) (f)
Local station only Section 1.1.1 (2) (a)
2-tier system Remote I/O station only Section 1.1.1 (2) (b)
Mixture of local station and remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (2) (c)
Coaxial loop
Local station only Section 1.1.1 (2) (d)
3-tier system 2-tier local station, 3-tier remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (2) (e)
Mixture of local station and remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (2) (f)
Local station only Section 1.1.1 (3) (a)
2-tier system Remote I/O station only Section 1.1.1 (3) (b)
Mixture of local station and remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (3) (c)
Twisted pair
Local station only Section 1.1.1 (3) (d)
3-tier system 2-tier local station, 3-tier remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (3) (e)
Mixture of local station and remote I/O station Section 1.1.1 (3) (f)

(1) Optical cable system

(a) 2-tier system 1: System configuration example using local stations only
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
Optical loop Optical loop
system cables, optical cables, etc. has to

M 1MP4 be changed.*1
2) CPU: When replacing from an integrated
type CPU, one new slot (32 points) is
L1 L3 1NS1 Network 1 1NS3
required.
3) Number of stations: When 65 modules
L2 1NS2
are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
into two networks of 64 modules or less
having a different network No.) are
required.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than that of MELSECNET(II), the distance between stations may
become shorter.

(b) 2-tier system 2: System configuration example using remote I/O stations only
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop Optical loop 1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
M 1MR when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, optical cables, etc. has to
R1 R3 1R1 Network 1 1R3 be changed.*1
2) CPU: When replacing from an integrated
R2 1R2 type CPU, one new slot (32 points) is
required.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than that of MELSECNET(II), the distance between stations may
become shorter.

1-2
1 INTRODUCTION

(c) 2-tier system 3: System configuration example using local stations/remote I/O stations
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, optical cables, etc. has to
be changed.*1
Optical loop 2) CPU: When replacing from an integrated
Optical loop
type CPU, one new slot (32 points) is
M
required.
Network Network 3) Composite system: As a mixture of a PLC
1NS1 1MP4/2MR 2R3
L1 R3 1 2 to PLC network and a remote I/O network
is not allowed on the Q series, the
1NS2
L2 network has to be divided into two
networks having different network Nos.
For this reason, a separate network
module for the remote master station is
required.
4) New installation: A separate optical cable
is required for the remote I/O stations.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than that of MELSECNET(II), the distance between stations may
become shorter.

(d) 3-tier system 1: System configuration example using local stations only
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
Optical loop Optical loop
exceed the Q series specification values
M 1MP4 when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, optical cables, etc. has to

L1 L3 1NS1 Network 1 1NS3 be changed.*1

2) CPU: When replacing from an integrated
type CPU, one new slot (32 points) is
L2/m 1NS2/2MP4
required.
3) Number of stations: When 65 modules
I1 I3 2NS1 Network 2 2NS3
are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
into two networks of 64 modules or less
I2 2NS2 having a different network No.) are
required.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than that of MELSECNET(II), the distance between stations may
become shorter.

1-3
1 INTRODUCTION

(e) 3-tier system 2: System configuration example using 2-tier local stations and 3-tier
remote I/O stations
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
Optical loop Optical loop
exceed the Q series specification values
M 1MP4 when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, optical cables, etc. has to

L1 L3 1NS1 Network 1 1NS3 be changed.*1

2) CPU: When replacing from an integrated
type CPU, one new slot (32 points) is
L2/m 1NS2/2MR
required.
3) Number of stations: When 65 modules
r1 r3 2R1 Network 2 2R3
are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
into two networks of 64 modules or less
r2 2R2 having a different network No.) are
required.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than that of MELSECNET(II), the distance between stations may
become shorter.

(f) 3-tier system 3: System configuration example using local stations/remote I/O stations
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
Optical loop system cables, optical cables, etc. has to
Optical loop
be changed.*1
M
1MP4 2) CPU: When replacing from an integrated
type CPU, one new slot (32 points) is
L1 L3
1NS1 Network 1 1NS3 required.
3) Composite system: As a mixture of a PLC
L2/m to PLC network and a remote I/O network
1NS2/2MP4/3MR
is not allowed on the Q series, the
I1 r3 Network 2 Network 3 network has to be divided into two
2NS1 3R3
networks having different network Nos.
2NS2 For this reason, a separate network
I2
module for the remote master station is
required.
4) New installation: A separate optical cable
is required for the remote I/O stations.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than that of MELSECNET(II), the distance between stations may
become shorter.

1-4
1 INTRODUCTION

(2) Coaxial cable system

(a) 2-tier system 1: System configuration example using local stations only
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, 3C-2V has to be changed
to 5C-2V.*1
2) Overall distance: If this value exceeds the
Coaxial loop Q series specification value when
Coaxial bus MELSECNET(II) system cables are re-
M used, measures (e.g. adding a repeater
1MP4
unit) are required.*1
Network 1
L1 L3 3) CPU: When replacing an integrated type
1NS1 1NS2 1NS3 CPU, one new slot (32 points) is required.
L2 4) Number of stations: When 65 modules
are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
into two or three networks of 32 modules
or less having a different network No.) are
required.
5) Duplex loop: When the transmission path
has to be duplexed, changes to an optical
loop system, etc. are required.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than MELSECNET(II), and as the transmission method is different,
the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter.

(b) 2-tier system 2: System configuration example using local stations only
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, 3C-2V has to be changed
to 5C-2V.*1
2) Overall distance: If this value exceeds the
Coaxial loop Q series specification value when
Coaxial bus MELSECNET(II) system cables are re-
M used, measures (e.g. adding a repeater
1MR
unit) are required.*1
Network 1
R1 R3 3) CPU: When replacing an integrated type
1R1 1R2 1R3 CPU, one new slot (32 points) is required.
R2 4) Number of stations: When 65 modules
are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
into two or three networks of 32 modules
or less having a different network No.) are
required.
5) Duplex loop: When the transmission path
has to be duplexed, changes to an optical
loop system, etc. are required.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than MELSECNET(II), and as the transmission method is different,
the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter.

1-5
1 INTRODUCTION

(c) 2-tier system 3: System configuration example using local stations/remote I/O stations
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, 3C-2V has to be changed
to 5C-2V.*1
2) Overall distance: If this value exceeds the
Q series specification value when
MELSECNET(II) system cables are re-
used, measures (e.g. adding a repeater
Coaxial loop
Coaxial bus unit) are required.*1
M 3) CPU: When replacing an integrated type
1MP4/2MR CPU, one new slot (32 points) is required.
Network 1 Network 2 4) Duplex loop: When the transmission path
L1 R3
has to be duplexed, changes to an optical
1NS1 1NS2 2R3
loop system, etc. are required.
L2
5) Composite system: As a mixture of a PLC
to PLC network and a remote I/O network
is not allowed on the Q series, the
network has to be divided into two
networks having different network Nos.
For this reason, a separate network
module for the remote master station is
required.
6) New installation: A separate coaxial cable
is required for the remote I/O stations.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than MELSECNET(II), and as the transmission method is different,
the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter.

1-6
1 INTRODUCTION

(d) 3-tier system 1: System configuration example using local stations only
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, 3C-2V has to be changed
Coaxial loop to 5C-2V.*1
Coaxial bus 2) Overall distance: If this value exceeds the
M
Q series specification value when
1MP4
MELSECNET(II) system cables are re-
L1 L3 Network 1
used, measures (e.g. adding a repeater
unit) are required.*1
1NS1 1NS2/2MP4 1NS3
L2/m 3) CPU: When replacing an integrated type
Network 2 CPU, one new slot (32 points) is required.
I1 I3 4) Number of stations: When 65 modules
2NS1 2NS2 2NS3 are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
I2 into two or three networks of 32 modules
or less having a different network No.) are
required.
5) Duplex loop: When the transmission path
has to be duplexed, changes to an optical
loop system, etc. are required.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than MELSECNET(II), and as the transmission method is different,
the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter.

(e) 3-tier system 2: System configuration example using 2-tier local stations and 3-tier
remote I/O stations
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, 3C-2V has to be changed
Coaxial loop to 5C-2V.*1
Coaxial bus 2) Overall distance: If this value exceeds the
M
Q series specification value when
1MP4
MELSECNET(II) system cables are re-
L1 L3 Network 1 used, measures (e.g. adding a repeater
unit) are required.*1
1NS1 1NS2/2MR 1NS3
L2/m 3) CPU: When replacing an integrated type
Network 2 CPU, one new slot (32 points) is required.
r1 r3 4) Number of stations: When 65 modules
2R1 2R2 2R3 are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
r2 into two or three networks of 32 modules
or less having a different network No.) are
required.
5) Duplex loop: When the transmission path
has to be duplexed, changes to an optical
loop system, etc. are required.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than MELSECNET(II), and as the transmission method is different,
the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter.

1-7
1 INTRODUCTION

(f) 3-tier system 3: System configuration example using local stations/remote I/O stations
MELSECNET( II ) MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
1) Distance between stations: If this value
exceed the Q series specification values
when re-using the MELSECNET(II)
system cables, 3C-2V has to be changed
to 5C-2V.*1
2) Overall distance: If this value exceeds the
Coaxial loop Q series specification value when
MELSECNET(II) system cables are re-
Coaxial bus
M used, measures (e.g. adding a repeater
1MP4 unit) are required.*1
L1 L3 Network 1 3) CPU: When replacing an integrated type
CPU, one new slot (32 points) is required.
L2/m
1NS1 1NS2/2MP4/3MR 1NS3 4) Duplex loop: When the transmission path
has to be duplexed, changes to an optical
Network 2 Network 3
loop system, etc. are required.
I1 r3
5) Composite system: As a mixture of a PLC
2NS1 2NS2 3R3
to PLC network and a remote I/O network
I2 is not allowed on the Q series, the
network has to be divided into two
networks having different network Nos.
For this reason, a separate network
module for the remote master station is
required.
6) New installation: A separate coaxial cable
is required for the remote I/O stations.
*1 As the transmission speed of MELSECNET/H is faster than MELSECNET(II), and as the transmission method is different,
the distance between stations and overall distance become shorter.

1-8
1 INTRODUCTION

(3) Twisted cable system

(a) 2-tier system 1: System configuration example using local stations only
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop

1MP4

1NS1 Network 1 1NS3

New installation: The installation has to be

1NS2
changed for an optical loop system or a
Coaxial bus coaxial bus system.

1MP4
Network 1
Twisted
1NS1 1NS2 1NS3
M

Twisted cables (using existing

cables)
L1 L2 L3
M Existing cables: Process the terminals for
MELSECNET/H connection.

L1 L2 L3

Twisted cables (using CC-Link

dedicated cables)

M New installation: Change the cables to CC-

Link dedicated cables.

L1 L2 L3

(b) 2-tier system 2: System configuration example using remote I/O stations only
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop

1MR

Twisted 1R1 Network 1 1R3 1) New installation: The installation has to

be changed for an optical loop system or
M
1R2 a coaxial bus system.
2) Wire-saving: Changing to a wire-saving
Coaxial bus network by using CC-Link or CC-Link/LT
R1 R2 R3
is also recommended.
1MR
Network 1

1R1 1R2 1R3

1-9
1 INTRODUCTION

(c) 2-tier system 3: System configuration example using local stations/remote I/O stations
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop

Network Network
1NS1 1 1MP4/2MR 2 2R3

1NS2
1) New installation: The installation has to
Coaxial bus be changed for an optical loop system or
a coaxial bus system.
1MP4/2MR
2) Composite system: As a mixture of a PLC
Network 1 Network 2
Twisted to PLC network and a remote I/O network
1NS1 1NS2 2R3 is not allowed on the Q series, the
M network has to be divided into two
Twisted/Optical loop networks having different network Nos.
For this reason, a separate network
L1 L2 R3 module for the remote master station is
1MP4/2MR 2R3 required.
Network 2
Network 1 (Twisted) (Optical loop) 3) Wire-saving: Changing to a wire-saving
network by using CC-Link or CC-Link/LT
1NS1 1NS2
is also recommended for remote I/O
stations.
Twisted/Coaxial bus

1MP4/2MR
Network 1 Network 2
(Twisted) (Coaxial bus)

1NS1 1NS2 2R3

1 - 10
1 INTRODUCTION

(d) 3-tier system 1: System configuration example using local stations only
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop

1MP4

1NS1 Network 1 1NS3

1NS2/2MP4

2NS1 Network 2 2NS3

New installation: The installation has to be

2NS2 changed for an optical loop system or a
coaxial bus system.
Coaxial bus

1MP4
Network 1

Twisted 1NS1 1NS2/2MP4 1NS3

M
Network 2

2NS1 2NS2 2NS3

L1 L2/m L3
Twisted (using existing cables)

1MP4
I1 I2 I3 Network 1

Existing cables: Process the terminals for

1NS1 1NS2/2MP4 1NS3
MELSECNET/H connection.

Network 2

2NS1 2NS2 2NS3

Twisted (using CC-Link

dedicated cables)

1MP4
Network 1
New installation: Change the cables to CC-
1NS1 1NS2/2MP4 1NS3 Link dedicated cables.

Network 2

2NS1 2NS2 2NS3

1 - 11
1 INTRODUCTION

(e) 3-tier system 2: System configuration example using 2-tier local stations and 3-tier
remote I/O stations
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop

1MP4

1NS1 Network 1 1NS3

Twisted 1NS2/2MR

M New installation: The installation has to be

2R1 Network 2 2R3
changed for an optical loop system or a
coaxial bus system.
L1 L2/m L3 2R2 A PLC to PLC network can be changed to a
twisted bus system, and a remote I/O
Coaxial bus
network can be changed to an optical loop or
coaxial bus system (refer to (c)).
1MP4
r1 r2 r3
Network 1

1NS1 1NS2/2MR 1NS3

Network 2

2R1 2R2 2R3

(f) 3-tier system 3: System configuration example using local stations/remote I/O stations
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop 1) New installation: The installation has to
be changed for an optical loop system or
1MP4 a coaxial bus system.
A PLC to PLC network can be changed to
1NS1 Network 1 1NS3 a twisted bus system, and a remote I/O
network can be changed to an optical
Twisted 1NS2/2MP4/3MR loop or coaxial bus system (refer to (c)).
By processing the terminals, the existing
M Network 2 Network 3
cables can be used for the twisted bus
2NS1 3R3
system.
2NS2
2) Composite system: As a mixture of a PLC
L1 L2/m L3
to PLC network and a remote I/O network
Coaxial bus
is not allowed on the Q series, the
1MP4 network has to be divided into two
I1 I2 r3 networks having different network Nos.
Network 1
For this reason, a separate network
1NS1 1NS2/2MP4/3MR 1NS3 module for the remote master station is
required.
Network 2 Network 3 3) Wire-saving: Changing to a wire-saving
network by using CC-Link or CC-Link/LT
2NS1 2NS2 3R3 is also recommended for remote I/O
stations.

1 - 12
1 INTRODUCTION

1.1.2 Transition procedure to a Q series MELSECNET/H system

(1) A/QnA (large type) series MELSECNET/10 network modules

The A/QnA (large type) series MELSECNET/10 network modules were discontinued on 30th September
2014.
The AnS/QnAS (small type) series were also discontinued on 30th September 2014, however, the
MELSECNET/10 network modules and A-A1S module conversion adapter are produced continuously.
When all A/QnA (large type) series modules are replaced with the MELSECNET/10, the replacement
Notice
(transition procedure 1) can be performed by mounting the AnS/QnAS (small type) series MELSECNET/10
network module on the A/QnA (large type) series base unit using the A-A1S module conversion adapter
(A1AD-SP).
(2) MELSECNET(II), MELSECNET/10 gateway set
The MELSECNET(II), MELSECNET/10 gateway set is produced continuously. The replacement (transition
procedure 2) can be performed
The following shows transition procedure 1 and transition procedure 2 as the transition procedure to a Q
series system.

(1) Transition procedure 1 (Simultaneous replacement with MELSECNET/10)

The entire MELSECNET(II) system is replaced with a MELSECNET/10 system with the wiring left as it
is, and then the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series system is replaced with the Q series system in stages.
Note, however, that the gradual transition cannot be made in a network where both of the A/AnS/QnA/
QnAS series system and the Q series system exist. This is because the MELSECNET/H twisted bus
system supports only the Q series system.

A1 Q1 Q1

A2 A5 A2 A5 Q2 Q5
MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET
(II) /10 /10(H)

Part of the A/AnS series The A/AnS series

A3 A4 Q3 A4 Q3 Q4
system is replaced system is replaced
with a Q series system, with the Q series
[System before transition] and the network is [Transition steps] system in stages. [System after transition]
replaced with
MELSECNET/10.
An A series system Qn Q series system

(1) MELSECNET(II), /B master station

Replace with the Q series system, and change to the MELSECNET/10 control station.
(2) MELSECNET(II), /B local station
For the stations to be replaced with a Q series system, replace the programmable controllers with the Q series,
and set the stations to MELSECNET/10 normal stations.
For the stations not to be replaced with a Q series system, replace the MELSECNET(II), /B data link modules
with the MELSECNET/10 network modules.
(3) Replacement of an A/AnS series system in stages
The A/AnS series system is replaced with a Q series system in stages to shift the system to a Q series system.

1 - 13
1 INTRODUCTION

(2) Transition procedure 2 (addition of gateway station)

MELSECNET(II), MELSECNET/B and MELSECNET/10 gateway stations are added on to shift the
system to a MELSECNET/10 system in stages.
(a) Example of replacing some A series programmable controllers in an existing system with
Q series programmable controllers

A1 A1

GW MELSEC
A2 A5 A2 station Q5
MELSECNET MELSECNET NET/10
(II) (II)

A gateway station is
A3 A4 A3 A4
introduced into a part of
the A/AnS series system
[System before transition] to shift the system to [System after transition]
a Q series system.
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/B

GW
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A1 A2 A3 A4 station

A gateway station is MELSEC

introduced into a part of NET/10
the A/AnS series system
Q5
to shift the system to
[System before transition] a Q series system. [System after transition]

(1) For the stations replaced with the Q series, the system is built with MELSECNET/10.
(2) The above MELSECNET/10 system is connected to the MELSECNET(II), /B system with the gateway station.

Master
station

Q2AS MNET MNET Qn MNET I/O

(II) /10 /10
Local station MELSECNET MELSECNET/10
(II) Local Control Normal
station station station

Local station

(3) At other stations, the A/AnS series system is used as it is.

1 - 14
1 INTRODUCTION

(b) Example of replacing with the Q series programmable controllers in stages to shift to a Q
series system

A1 A1 Q1
Q5

A2 A5 A2 MELSEC Q2 Q5
MELSECNET NET GW MELSECNET MELSECNET
(II) (II) station /10 /10(H)

A gateway station
A3 A4 A3 Q4 Q3 Q4
is introduced to
replace the system Replacement of the
[System before transition] with a Q series [Transition steps] transition steps is [System after transition]
system in stages. performed in stages
to replace the system
with the Q series system.
MELSECNET/B MELSECNET/B

GW
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A1 A2 station A5

A gateway station Q3 MELSEC Q4

is introduced to NET/10

replace the system

with a Q series
[System before transition] system in stages. [Transition steps]

(1) For the stations replaced with the Q series, the system is built with MELSECNET/10.
(2) The above MELSECNET/10 system is connected to the MELSECNET(II), /B system with the gateway station.

Qn MNET I/O
Master /10
station
Normal
Q2AS MNET MNET station

MELSECNET (II) /10

Local station MELSECNET/10
(II) Local Control
station station
Qn MNET I/O
/10
Local station
Normal
station

(3) The A/AnS series system is replaced with a Q series system in stages to replace the system with a Q series
system.

1 - 15
1 INTRODUCTION

1.1.3 Transition to and addition of QCPU by utilizing existing network MELSECNET (II)
and /B
This section describes the method to replace some programmable controller CPUs in an existing
MELSECNET (II) network to QCPU or add QCPUs without changing whole MELSECNET (II) and /B
network.

Outline: Mount a local station data link module to the QA1S51B or QA1S6B extension base unit for Q
series (Q mode) or the QA6B (A-A1S module conversion adapter (requires the A1ADP-SP)), and then
connect it to the MELSECNET (II) and /B.

Q series (High Performance model QCPU or Universal model QCPU)

QA1S51B or QA1S6B type extension base unit*1

Local station data link module

MELSECNET (II) and /B

Model name Product name

A1SJ71AP23Q MELSECNET(II) local station data link module for optical fiber cable (SI)
A1SJ71AR23Q MELSECNET(II) local station data link module for coaxial cable
A1S71AT23BQ MELSECNET/B local station data link module for shielded twisted pair cable
(Note) Present MELSECNET (II) and /B data link module can not be used.

Notes
1) The High Performance model QCPU and Universal model QCPU with a serial number (first five
digits) of "13102" or later can be used. Other CPU modules cannot be used.
2) The module is dedicated to local stations.
3) A base unit that can be mounted to the module is the QA1S6B or QA6B (A-A1S module
conversion adapter (requires the A1ADP-XY)).

*1 Connect the QA1S51B as the last level because it has only IN on the extension connector. The QA6B (large type)
extension base unit cannot be connected next to the QA1S51B.
The specified voltage cannot be supplied to the QA1S51B when the extension cable is long because it is the extension
base unit (type requiring no power supply module). Calculate the voltage drop.
Example) when the A1SJ71AR23Q is mounted on the QA1S51B
• Resistance value of the extension cable QC30B: 0.172
• Internal current consumption (5VDC) of the A1SJ71AR23Q: 0.80A
• Internal current consumption (5VDC) of the QA1S51B: 0.12A
Calculating the value of voltage drop by the above conditions shows the result is 0.158V. Therefore, the QC30B cannot be
used because the calculation result exceeds 0.15V described in the manual.
However, the QC30B can be used because the internal current consumption (5VDC) of the A1SJ71AP23Q and
A1SJ71AT23BQ is 0.33A and 0.66A respectively.

1 - 16
1 INTRODUCTION

(1) Example of replacing some A/AnS series programmable controllers in an existing

system with Q series programmable controllers

A1 A1 Replaced station

A2 MELSECNET A4 A2 MELSECNET Q4
(II) (II)
Replace A/AnS series
programmable controllers
A3 with Q series programmable A3
controllers
[System before transition] [System after transition]

Master station
Q series programmable controller main base
Qn I/O I/O I/O I/O
C
P
U

(High Performance model QCPU)

I/O I/O
Local station MELSECNET (II)

(QA1S6 B)

Local station data link module

Local station

1 - 17
1 INTRODUCTION

(2) Example of adding Q series programmable controllers to an existing system

Station to add
A1 A1

A2 MELSECNET Q5
A2 MELSECNET A4 (II)
(II)
Add Q series programmable
controllers to A/AnS series
A3 programmable controllers A3 A4

[System before transition] [System after transition]

Master station
Q series programmable controller main base
Qn I/O I/O I/O I/O
C
P
U

(High Performance model QCPU)

I/O I/O
Local station MELSECNET (II)

(QA1S6 B)

Local station data link module

Local station Local station

1 - 18
1 INTRODUCTION

1.1.4 Replacement selection points

The following is the main three methods to replace any one stations in the existing MELSECNET(II) with
the QCPU or to add the QCPU in the system.
• Simultaneous replacement to the MELSECNET/10
• Relay using gateway set
• Local station data link

This section describes check points for selection.

Definition of symbols ( , , ) in the Advantage field shown on the pages starting from the following
page is as follows.

: Requires no system change, has no restrictions on replacement or has great advantage since system change is minor,
even if required.
: Has some advantages although some restrictions on replacement exists and system change is required.
: System change is required depending on restrictions on replacement and items must be reviewed are many.

Selection points

(1) Consider the following points and select replacement regarding replacement to/
addition of the QCPU
(a) Whether the network cable can be utilized and laying change: Cost phase
Consider from the views whether the existing cable can be utilized without change, partial
change is sufficient or new laying is required.
(b) Necessity of a new module: Cost phase
Consider from the views from the number of the modules and the type of the module have
to be prepared.
(c) Affection to the program by changing network parameters: Man-hour taken for design,
maintenance
Consider from the views whether the existing network parameter setting can be utilized
without change and how much network parameter change affects to the sequence
program.
(d) Ease of phased replacement: Extensibility
When replacing the network having multiple stations in stages, consider from the views
from ease of replacement/addition including the points from (a) to (c) above.

(2) Selection differs depending on system configuration, network parameter setting, and
module replacement method other than network.
Select a method suitable for the actual system with reference to the contents starting
from the following page.

1 - 19
1 INTRODUCTION

(1) Replacing the existing A/AnS/QnA/QnASCPU with the QCPU

This section describes the methods for replacing the A/AnS/QnA/QnASCPU in the existing
MELSECNET(II) with the QCPU.
(a) Replacing the network to the MELSECNET/10 simultaneously
This method replaces arbitrary stations of the existing MELSECNET(II) with the QCPU and replaces
the network to the MELSECNET/10 simultaneously.

Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration

A1 A1

A2 A6 A2 A6

MELSECNET(II) MELSECNET/10

A3 A5 A3 Q5 Replaced QCPU

A4 A4

Item Advantage Outline Reference

• Laying change is not required since the existing network
Optical cable can be used without change. Section 2.2.1
cable • Due to restrictions on station-to-station distance in some (1)
cable types, check the cable type if the distance is long.
• Change from coaxial loop to coaxial bus is required.
Coaxial • One side of the existing coaxial cable can be utilized. Section 2.2.1
loop • Due to restrictions on overall cable distance, if the distance (2)
Cable
is long, repeater module is required.
laying
Cost • Since the twisted pair cables can be used for the
MELSECNET/H only, all stations must be replaced with
QCPU.
Twisted Section 2.2.1
• When replacing the stations with QCPU step-by-step or
pair (3)
replacing with the remote I/O network, change the twisted
pair cables to coaxial bus cables. (The twisted pair cables
cannot be used for the remote I/O network.)*1
• All the existing stations are required to be replaced with the
Network module -
MELSECNET/10 modules.
Only first half set
• Setting made to the existing network parameter can be Section 2.5.1
in second tier
utilized without change. (1)
system
• Station-specific parameter setting is required.
Modification
Latter half set in • If the AnN, AnA, or AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU) Section 2.5.1
on software
second tier system exists, newly set network parameters and modify the (1)
program.
• Since the second tier and the third tier is separate network, Section 2.5.3,
Three-tier system
reviewing the network parameter and program is required Section 2.5.4
• By simultaneous replacement to the MELSECNET/10,
replacing arbitrary station with the QCPU is possible.
Extensibility • If modification on software is required, modifying it at -
replacement of the first module allows omitting modification
to the second module or later.
*1 Twisted pair cables can be used by replacing the remote I/O station with a normal station and configuring a PLC to PLC
network.

1 - 20
1 INTRODUCTION

(b) Relaying using gateway set

This method installs a relay station using gateway set between the replaced QCPU and the existing
MELSECNET(II) for sharing link data.

Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration

A1 A1

A2 A6 A2 A6

MELSECNET(II) MELSECNET(II)
1st stage Relay
A3 A5 A3 station
MELSECNET/10 QCPU

Install the relay Replaced station

A4 A4 station at ex-A5 from A5 station
station position.

2nd stage

A1

A2 A6 QCPU

MELSECNET(II)
MELSECNET/10
Relay
station QCPU

Install the relay Replaced station

A4 station at ex-A5 from A5 station
station position.

Item Advantage Outline Reference

• Installing a relay station (gateway set) at the position
1st where the replaced QCPU is mounted allows
stage eliminating cable laying change. Lay only between the
Cable
relay station and the replaced QCPU station. Section 6.1
laying
• Since the station number of the existing
2nd
Cost MELSECNET(II) and that of the MELSECNET/10 after
stage
replacement changes, cable laying change is required.
1st
• Add gateway set as the relay station.
Network stage Section 6.1,
module 2nd • Change the replaced station's module to QCPU- Section 6.2
stage compatible module in each replacement.
• All data relay is disabled due to restrictions on the
number of send data per station. Therefore, reduce
relay data. Program change according to the relay data
is also required.
Modification on software • Since the station number of the existing Section 6.4
MELSECNET(II) and that of the MELSECNET/10 after
replacement change in each replacement, modifying
network parameter, data interlink transmission
parameter, and program in each case is required.
• Since a module changes to the QCPU in each
Extensibility replacement, even in the last stage, changing a module -
again is unnecessarily.

1 - 21
1 INTRODUCTION

(c) Replacing a station using the MELSECNET local station data link module
This method replaces arbitrary station with the QCPU in the existing MELSECNET(II).

Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration

A1 A1

A2 A6 A2 A6

MELSECNET(II) MELSECNET(II)

A3 A5 A3 Q5 Replaced QCPU

A4 A4 Mount the local station data link module

to the QA1S6 B.
(Refer to Section 1.1.3 *1)

Item Advantage Outline Reference

• Replacement without changing the existing network is
Cable
possible. Laying change of optical loop, coaxial loop, and Section 7.1 (1)
laying
twisted pair cable are unnecessary.
• Connect the extension base unit (QA1S6B) to the
Cost replacement station and mount local station data link
Network module on it.
Section 7.2
module • In the last stage, where all stations become the QCPUs,
removing the local station data link modules and
replacing the MELSECNET/H modules are required.
• Since the existing network is held, a link without
parameter and program modification is possible.
Two-tier • As link refresh is performed with the FROM/TO
Section 7.4
system instructions, program addition is required.
(Utilizing a comp sample program allows eliminating
program creation.)
• If the corresponding station before replacement is the
Modification master station for the third tier, since the replaced module
on software cannot be the MELSECNET(ll) master station, changing
the third tier to the MELSECNET/H (10) is required.
Three-tier Modifying the network parameter and program for the
Section 7.3
system third tier is required.
• As link refresh is performed with the FROM/TO
instructions, program addition is required.
(Utilizing a comp sample program allows eliminating
program creation.)
• Replacing arbitrary station by the QCPU with the existing
Extensibility -
network parameter held is possible.

1 - 22
1 INTRODUCTION

(2) Adding the QCPU to the existing network system

This section describes the methods for adding the QCPU in the existing network system.
(a) Replacing the network to the MELSECNET/10 simultaneously
This method simultaneously replaces the existing network with the MELSECNET/10 and adds the
QCPU.

Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration

A1 A1

A2 A6
A2 A6

MELSECNET(II) MELSECNET/10
A3 Q7 Added QCPU
A3 A5

A4 A5
A4

Item Advantage Outline Reference

• The existing cable can be utilized, however; since one
station has been added, laying change of before and after
Optical Section 2.2.1
the added station is required.
cable (1)
• Due to restrictions on station-to-station distance in some
cable types, check the cable type if the distance is long.
• Change from coaxial loop to coaxial bus is required.
Coaxial One side of the existing coaxial cable can be utilized. Section 2.2.1
Cable loop • Due to restrictions on overall cable distance, if the distance (2)
laying is long, repeater module is required.
Cost
• Since the twisted pair cables can be used for the
MELSECNET/H only, all stations must be replaced with
QCPU.
Twisted Section 2.2.1
• When replacing the stations with QCPU step-by-step or
pair (3)
replacing with the remote I/O network, change the twisted
pair cables to coaxial bus cables. (The twisted pair cables
cannot be used for the remote I/O network.)*1
• All the existing stations are required to be replaced with the
Network module -
MELSECNET/10 modules.
Only first half set
• Data link is possible by only changing the existing network Section 2.5.1
in second tier
parameter according to the added station(s). (1)
system
• Station-specific parameter setting is required.
Modification
Latter half set in • If the AnN, AnA, or AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU) Section 2.5.1
on software
second tier system exists, newly set network parameters and modify the (1)
program.
• Since the second tier and the third tier is separate network, Section 2.5.3,
Three-tier system
reviewing the network parameter and program is required. Section 2.5.4
• By simultaneous replacement to the MELSECNET/10, an
arbitrary station can be replaced with the QCPU.
• If modification on software is required, modifying
Extensibility parameters and a program at addition of the first module -
allows data link. At addition of the second module or later,
data link is possible by only changing the existing network
parameter according to the added station.
*1 Twisted pair cables can be used by replacing the remote I/O station with a normal station and configuring a PLC to PLC
network.

1 - 23
1 INTRODUCTION

(b) Adding the QCPU using gateway set

This method relays using gateway set when the QCPU is added and shares link data.

Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration

A1 A1

A2 A6
A2 A6 Added
QCPU
MELSECNET(II) MELSECNET(II)
Relay MELSECNET/10
A3 station QCPU
A3 A5
Add a relay
station.
A4 A5
A4

Item Advantage Outline Reference

• Since a relay station is added, cable laying change is
1st required.
stage • Newly laying between the relay station and the added
Cable QCPU is required.
Section 6.1
laying • Change to the existing MELSECNET(II) side is
2nd unnecessarily.
Cost
stage Data link is possible by only changing laying due to
station added to the MELSECNET/10.
1st
• Adding gateway set as the relay station is required.
Network stage Section 6.1,
module 2nd Section 6.2
• Data link is possible by only adding the QCPU.
stage
• All data relay is disabled due to restrictions on the
number of send data per station. Therefore, reduce
Modification on software Section 6.4
relay data. Program change according to the relay
data is also required.
• Only the QCPU is added to the MELSECNET/10
side. The addition does not affect the system
configuration of the existing MELSECNET(II).
Extensibility -
• As necessary, replacing each station in the
MELSECNET(II) with the QCPU and changing the
system to the MELSECNET/10 is possible.

1 - 24
1 INTRODUCTION

(c) Adding the QCPU using the MELSECNET local station data link module
This method adds the QCPU without changing the existing MELSECNET(II) using local station data
link module.

Existing network configuration Replaced network configuration

Change the station number

M M
of ex-L5 to L6
L1 L6
L1 L5

MELSECNET(II) MELSECNET(II)
L2 L5 Added QCPU
L2 L4
Mount the local station data
L3 L4 link module to the QA1S6 B
L3 and add the new L5 station.
(Refer to Section 1.1.3 *1)

Item Advantage Outline Reference

• Data link is possible by only changing the laying of
Cable Two-tier optical loop, coaxial loop, and twisted pair cable
Section 7.1 (1)
laying system according to the added station, without changing the
existing network.
• Connect the extension base unit (QA1S6B) to the
Cost addition station and mount local station data link
module on it.
Network module • In the last stage, where all stations become the Section 7.2
QCPUs, removing the local station data link modules
and replacing the MELSECNET/H modules are
required.
• Data link is possible by only changing the parameter
Modification on software Section 7.4
according to the added station.
• Only the addition of a network and program
modification are sufficient for adding a station. Station
addition is easy.
Extensibility • Data link is possible by only changing the laying of -
optical loop, coaxial loop, and twisted pair cable
according to the added station, without changing the
existing network.

1 - 25
1 INTRODUCTION

1.2 Replacement of the MELSECNET/10 for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS Series with

the MELSECNET/H for Q Series

The following shows the configuration of a MELSECNET/H network system for Q after transition and the
system configuration precautions for transition for each of the system configurations for MELSECNET/
10 network systems for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series.
For details, refer to CHAPTER 4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)
and CHAPTER 5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10(REMOTE I/O NETWORK).

(1) PLC to PLC network

Pay attention to the following common precautions when replacing PLC to PLC networks.

Common precautions
1) Network parameters must be set for MELSECNET/H module of normal stations.
When replacing MELSECNET/10 module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN/AnA/AnSCPU
(excluding AnUS(H)CPU), newly set network parameters.
(a) Optical loop system
MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop Optical loop
The following item is provided in addition
1MP1 1MP1 to common precautions (1) above.
• When mixing with MELSECNET/10
modules for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series,
1NS2 Network 1 1NS4 1NS2 Network 1 1NS4
set the MELSECNET/10 mode (control
station) or MELSECNET/10 mode
1NS3 1NS3
(normal station) as the network type.

(b) Coaxial bus system

MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Coaxial bus Coaxial bus The following item is provided in addition
to common precautions (1) above.
1MP1 1MP1 • When mixing with MELSECNET/10
Network 1 Network 1 modules for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series,
set the MELSECNET/10 mode (control
1NS2 1NS3 1NS4 1NS2 1NS3 1NS4 station) or MELSECNET/10 mode
(normal station) as the network type.

1 - 26
1 INTRODUCTION

(c) Coaxial loop system

MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
The following item is provided in addition
to common precautions (1) described on
the previous page.
• Overall distance: If this value exceeds
Coaxial loop the Q series specification value when
Coaxial bus the MELSECNET/10 system cables are
1MP1 re-used, measures (e.g. adding a
1MP1
repeater unit) are required.
Network 1
1NS2 Network 1 1NS4 • Number of stations: When 64 modules
are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
1NS2 1NS3 1NS4
1NS3 into two or three networks of 32 modules
or less having a different network No.)
are required.
• Duplex loop: When the transmission
path has to be duplexed, changes to an
optical loop system, etc. are required.

(2) Remote I/O network

Pay attention to the following common precautions when replacing remote I/O networks.

Common precautions
1) Modules for remote I/O of the CPU module on each master station
(a) When the Q series CPU module on the master station is used
On the remote I/O network, the MELSECNET/H module and MELSECNET/10 module for A/
AnS/QnA/QnAS series cannot be used in combination. When the master station is replaced
with the Q series modules, replace all remote I/O station with the MELSECNET/H module for
the Q series.
(b) When the AnU(S)/QnA(S) series CPU module on the master station is used
On the remote I/O network, the MELSECNET/H module for the Q series and MELSECNET/10
module for the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series can be used in combination using MELSECNET/10
mode.

: Connection allowed, ×: Connection not allowed

Remote I/O station MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Remote master station for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series for Q series
AnU(S)/QnA(S)CPU
+ *1

MELSECNET/10 module (MELSECNET/10 mode)

for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series
Q series CPU module
+ ×
(MELSECNET/H mode)
MELSECNET/H module for Q series

*1 Modules with a serial number (first five digits) of "15012" or later

1) When replacing a multiplex master system, select Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, or

Q25PRHCPU as the CPU module.
2) When replacing a parallel master system, build a separate network having a different network No.

1 - 27
1 INTRODUCTION

(a) Optical loop system

• When the master station is replaced
MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Optical loop Optical loop

1MR 1MR
The module configuration example when
the master station is replaced
1MR: QCPU + QJ71LP21-25
1R1 Network 1 1R3 1R1 Network 1 1R3
1R1 to 1R3:
QJ72LP25-25 (MELSECNET/H mode)
1R2 1R2

• When the module is replaced gradually

MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10 System configuration precautions
Optical loop Optical loop

1MR 1MR The example when the module is replaced

(An) (An)
gradually
1R1 Network 1 1R3 1R1 Network 1 1R3 (1R3 is replaced with the Q series module)
(An) (An) (An) (Qn) 1R3: A(1S)J72(Q)LP25 QJ72LP25-25
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
1R2 1R2
(An) (An)

1 - 28
1 INTRODUCTION

(b) Coaxial bus system

• When the master station is replaced
MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
Coaxial bus Coaxial bus
The module configuration example when
1MR 1MR the master station is replaced
Network 1 Network 1 1MR: QCPU + QJ71BR11
1R1 to 1R3: QJ72BR15 (MELSECNET/H
1R1 1R2 1R3 1R1 1R2 1R3 mode)

• When the module is replaced gradually

MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/10 System configuration precautions
Coaxial bus Coaxial bus
The example when the module is replaced
1MR 1MR
(An) (An) gradually
Network 1 Network 1 (1R3 is replaced with the Q series module)
1R3: A(1S)J72(Q)BR15  QJ72BR15
1R1 1R2 1R3 1R1 1R2 1R3
(An) (An) (An) (An) (An) (Qn) (MELSECNET/10 mode)

(c) Coaxial loop system

MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H System configuration precautions
• The Q series modules do not support
the coaxial loop system. When the
existing system is replaced with the
coaxial loop system, replace all remote
I/O stations.
Coaxial loop • Overall distance: If this value exceeds
Coaxial bus the Q series specification value when
1MR the MELSECNET/10 system cables are
1MR
re-used, measures (e.g. adding a
Network 1
1R1 Network 1 1R3 repeater unit) are required.
• Number of stations: When 64 modules
1R1 1R2 1R3
1R2 are connected, measures (e.g. dividing
into two or three networks of 32 modules
or less having a different network No.)
are required.
• Duplex loop: When the transmission
path has to be duplexed, changes to an
optical loop system, etc. are required.

1 - 29
1 INTRODUCTION

1.3 Replacing the CC-Link for A/AnS/QnA/QnAS Series with the CC-Link
for Q Series

When using the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series CC-Link system master/local module, replace it with the
QJ61BT11N CC-Link system master/local module.
Currently used CC-Link dedicated cables, remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and intelligent
device stations can be used excluding some models.
For details on models that cannot be used, check Section 8.7 Other Precautions.

1 - 30
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II)

2

AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.1 List of MELSECNET (II) and /B Alternative Models

(1) Replacement of MELSECNET (II) modules with MELSECNET/H modules

Network type A/AnS/A0J2(H) series Alternative models for Q series
A1NCPUP21
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUP21-S1
A3NCPUP21
Optical loop CPU module + QJ71LP21-25 (Optical loop: SI cable
A2ACPUP21
(CPU integrated type) supported)
A2ACPUP21-S1
A3ACPUP21
A2CCPUP21
A0J2HCPUP21
A1NCPUP21-S3
A2NCPUP21-S3
A2NCPUP21-S4
Optical loop CPU module + QJ71LP21G (Optical loop: GI cable
A3NCPUP21-S3
(CPU integrated type) supported)
A2ACPUP21-S3
A2ACPUP21-S4
A3ACPUP21-S3
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPUR21
Coaxial loop
A2ACPUR21 CPU module + QJ71BR11 (Coaxial bus)
(CPU integrated type)
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPUR21
A2CCPUR21
A0J2HCPUR21
Optical loop AJ71AP21
QJ71LP21-25 (Optical loop: SI cable supported)
(Standalone) A1SJ71AP21
AJ71P21-S3
AJ71AP21-S3
Optical loop
AJ71P22-S3*1 QJ71LP21G (Optical loop: GI cable supported)
(Standalone)
AJ71AP22-S3*1
A1SJ71AP21-S3
Coaxial loop AJ71AR21
QJ71BR11 (Coaxial bus)
(Standalone) A1SJ71AR21
*1 These modules can be used as the master station only.

2-1
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) Replacement of MELSECNET/B modules with MELSECNET/H modules

Network type A/AnS series Alternative models for Q series
AJ71AT21B QJ71NT11B (Twisted bus)*1
Twisted pair QJ71LP21-25 (Optical loop: SI cable supported)
A1SJ71AT21B
QJ71BR11 (Coaxial bus)
*1 Supported by the QCPU only. A system including an A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series module cannot be configured.
The twisted bus system can be employed for a PLC to PLC network, but not for a remote I/O network.

2-2
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.2 Performance Specifications Comparisons

2.2.1 Module performance comparisons

(1) Comparison between MELSECNET (II) module (optical loop) and MELSECNET/H module
(optical loop)
(a) SI optical fiber cable, H-PCF optical fiber cable
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
Compat-
Item MELSECNET ( II ) module MELSECNET/H module Precautions for replacement
ibility
Optical loop Optical loop (QJ71LP21-25)
(MELSECNET/10 mode),
Max. 2048 points and max. number of I/
(MELSECNET/H mode),
X/Y O points of CPU module on master
(MELSECNET/H extended mode) 8192
station
points
Maximum • (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points • (MELSECNET/10 mode) 8192 points
number of • (MELSECNET II mode), • (MELSECNET/H mode),
B
link points (MELSECNET II composite mode) (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
per network 4096 points 16384 points
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points • (MELSECNET/10 mode) 8192 points
• (MELSECNET II mode), • (MELSECNET/H mode),
W
(MELSECNET II composite mode) (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
4096 points 16384 points
When the number of bytes
• (MELSECNET/10 mode),
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 bytes exceeds 2000, mount two
(MELSECNET/H mode)
Maximum number • (MELSECNET II mode), modules having the same
{(LY+LB)  8+(2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
of link points per (MELSECNET II composite mode) network No., or set all modules
• (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
station First half: 1024 bytes on the network in the
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 35840
Second half: 1024 bytes MELSECNET/H extended
bytes
mode.
Communication
1.25Mbps 25Mbps/10Mbps
speed
• Set the remote I/O network
Number of stations to a separate network.
65 stations (master station: 1, 64 stations
connected in one • For the 65th station,
local station + remote I/O station: 64) (control station: 1 normal station: 63)
network configure a separate
network.
SI optical cable When using existing SI cables,
SI optical cable H-PCF optical cable the distance between stations
Applicable cable
H-PCF optical cable Broad-band H-PCF optical cable may be shortened. (Refer to
QSI optical cable Section 2.2.2.)
Overall distance 10km 30km
To ensure the same distance
as before replacement, either
Distance between
Refer to Section 2.2.2. Refer to Section 2.2.2. change the optical cable, or
stations
install a gateway station
midway along existing cables.
Maximum number New MELSECNET/H
- 239
of networks parameter (mandatory)
Communication Nothing to be noted though the
Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method
method communication method differs.
Transmission
Duplex loop
method
Modulation method Nothing to be noted though the
(Modulation method) CMI method (Encoding method) NRZI coding
(Encoding method) modulation method differs.
Transmission
HDLC standards (frame format)
format
Error control
CRC(X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over
system
• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable
RAS function
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
CPU integrated type: 0 point, When replacing from a CPU
Number of 32 points per slot
standalone:32 points per slot (I/O integrated type, an additional
occupied I/O points (I/O assignment: intelli. 32 points)
assignment: special 32 points) slot (32 points) is required.

2-3
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(b) Modules for GI optical cable

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
Compat- Precautions for
Item MELSECNET ( II ) module MELSECNET/H module
ibility replacement
Optical loop Optical loop (QJ71LP21-25)
(MELSECNET/10 mode),
Max. 2048 points and max. number of I/O (MELSECNET/H mode),
X/Y
points of CPU module on master station (MELSECNET/H extended mode) 8192
points
Maximum • (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points • (MELSECNET/10 mode) 8192 points
number of • (MELSECNET II mode), • (MELSECNET/H mode),
B
link points (MELSECNET II composite mode) (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
per network 4096 points 16384 points
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points • (MELSECNET/10 mode) 8192 points
• (MELSECNET II mode), • (MELSECNET/H mode),
W
(MELSECNET II composite mode) (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
4096 points 16384 points
• (MELSECNET/10 mode), When the number of bytes
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 bytes (MELSECNET/H mode) exceeds 2000, mount two
Maximum number • (MELSECNET II mode), {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 modules having the same
of link points per (MELSECNET II composite mode) bytes network No., or set all
station First half: 1024 bytes • (MELSECNET/H extended mode) modules on the network in the
Second half: 1024 bytes {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 35840 MELSECNET/H extended
bytes mode.
Communication
1.25Mbps 10Mbps
speed
• Set the remote I/O network
Number of stations to a separate network.
65 stations (master station: 1, 64 stations (control station: 1 normal
connected in one • For the 65th station,
local station + remote I/O station: 64) station: 63)
network configure a separate
network.
Applicable cable GI optical cable
Overall distance 10km 30km
Distance between
GI optical cable: 2km
stations
New MELSECNET/H
Maximum number
- 239 parameter
of networks
(mandatory)
Nothing to be noted though
Communication
Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method the communication method
method
differs.
Transmission
Duplex loop
method
Modulation Nothing to be noted though
method (Encoding (Modulation method) CMI method (Encoding method) NRZI coding the modulation method
method) differs.
Transmission
HDLC standards (frame format)
format
Error control
CRC(X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over
system
• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable
RAS function
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
Number of CPU integrated type: 0 point, When replacing from a CPU
32 points per slot (I/O assignment: intelli.
occupied I/O Standalone:32 points per slot (I/O integrated type, an additional
32 points)
points assignment: special 32 points) slot (32 points) is required.

2-4
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) Comparison between MELSECNET (II) module (coaxial loop) and MELSECNET/H
module (coaxial bus)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Compat- Precautions for
Item MELSECNET ( II ) module MELSECNET/H module
ibility replacement
Coaxial loop Coaxial bus (QJ71BR11)
(MELSECNET/10 mode),
Max. 2048 points and max. number of I/O (MELSECNET/H mode),
X/Y
points of CPU module on master station (MELSECNET/H extended mode) 8192
points
Maximum • (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points • (MELSECNET/10 mode) 8192 points
number of • (MELSECNET II mode), • (MELSECNET/H mode),
B
link points (MELSECNET II composite mode) (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
per network 4096 points 16384 points
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points • (MELSECNET/10 mode) 8192 points
• (MELSECNET II mode), • (MELSECNET/H mode),
W
(MELSECNET II composite mode) (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
4096 points 16384 points
• (MELSECNET/10 mode), When the number of bytes
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 bytes (MELSECNET/H mode) exceeds 2000, mount two
Maximum number • (MELSECNET II mode), {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 modules having the same
of link points per (MELSECNET II composite mode) bytes network No., or set all
station First half: 1024 bytes • (MELSECNET/H extended mode) modules on the network in the
Second half: 1024 bytes {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 35840 MELSECNET/H extended
bytes mode.
Communication
1.25Mbps 10Mbps
speed
• Set the remote I/O network
Number of stations to a separate network.
65 stations (master station: 1, 32 stations (control station: 1, normal
connected in one • For the 33th station,
local station + remote I/O station: 64) station: 31)
network configure a separate
network.
When using existing cables,
3C-2V the overall distance and
Applicable cable
5C-2V distance between stations
becomes shorter.
Either use an A6BR10/
3C-2V: 10km 3C-2V: 300m A6BR10-DC type repeater
Overall distance
5C-2V: 10km 5C-2V: 500m unit, or configure a separate
network.
When using the 3C-2V, use
Distance between 3C-2V: 500m 3C-2V: 300m
the A6BR10/A6BR10-DC
stations 5C-2V: 500m 5C-2V: 500m
type repeater unit.
Maximum number New MELSECNET/H
- 239
of networks parameter (mandatory)
Nothing to be noted though
Communication
Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method the communication method
method
differs.
Nothing to be noted though
Transmission
Duplex loop Single bus the transmission method
method
differs.
Modulation Nothing to be noted though
method (Encoding (Modulation method) CMI method (Encoding method) Manchester code the modulation method
method) differs.
Transmission
HDLC standards (frame format)
format
Error control
CRC(X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over
system
The loopback function cannot
• Loop-back function due to error
be used on a coaxial bus
detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local link
RAS function system. To use the loopback
• Diagnostic function for checking local lines
function, using an optical loop
link lines
system is recommended.
Number of CPU integrated type: 0 point, When replacing from a CPU
32 points per slot (I/O assignment: intelli.
occupied I/O Standalone:32 points per slot (I/O integrated type, an additional
32 points)
points assignment: special 32 points) slot (32 points) is required.

2-5
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(3) Comparison between MELSECNET/B module (twisted pair) and MELSECNET/H module
(optical loop/coaxial bus)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
MELSECNET/B module MELSECNET/H module Compat- Precautions for
Item
Optical loop Coaxial bus ibility replacement
Twisted pair
(QJ71LP21-25) (QJ71BR11)
(MELSECNET/10 mode),
Max. 2048 points and max. number of I/O (MELSECNET/H mode),
X/Y
points of CPU module on master station (MELSECNET/H extended mode) 8192
points
Maximum • (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points • (MELSECNET/10 mode) 8192 points
number of • (MELSECNET II mode), • (MELSECNET/H mode),
B
link points (MELSECNET II composite mode) 4096 (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
per network points 16384 points
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points • (MELSECNET/10 mode) 8192 points
• (MELSECNET II mode), • (MELSECNET/H mode),
W
(MELSECNET II composite mode) 4096 (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
points 16384 points
When the number of bytes
• (MELSECNET/10 mode),
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 bytes exceeds 2000, mount two
(MELSECNET/H mode)
Maximum number • (MELSECNET II mode), modules having the same
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
of link points per (MELSECNET II composite mode) network No., or set all
• (MELSECNET/H extended mode)
station Link parameter first half: 1024 bytes modules on the network in
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 35840
Link parameter second half: 1024 bytes the MELSECNET/H
bytes
extended mode.
Communication 25Mbps/10Mbps -
125kbps/250kbps/500kbps/1Mbps
speed - 10Mbps
64 stations (control
Set the remote I/O network
station: 1 -
Number of stations to a separate network.
32 stations (master station: 1, normal station: 63)
connected in one
local station + remote I/O station: 31) 32 stations (control
network Set the remote I/O network
- station: 1
to a separate network.
normal station: 31)
SI optical cable
H-PCF optical cable
A new optical cable has to
Broad-band H-PCF -
be installed.
Applicable cable Shielded twisted pair cable optical cable
QSI optical cable
3C-2V A new coaxial cable has to
-
5C-2V be installed.
30km -
125kbps: 1200m
Either use an A6BR10/
250kbps: 600m
Overall distance 3C-2V: 300m A6BR10-DC type repeater
500kbps: 400m -
5C-2V: 500m unit, or configure a
1Mbps: 200m
separate network.
When 1200 m is required,
use GI optical cables for all
Refer to Section
- optical cables, and use
125kbps: 1200m 2.2.2.
QJ71LP21G as the
Distance between 250kbps: 600m
module.
stations 500kbps: 400m
Either use an A6BR10/
1Mbps: 200m
3C-2V: 300m A6BR10-DC type repeater
-
5C-2V: 500m unit, or configure a
separate network.
Maximum number New MELSECNET/H
- 239
of networks parameter (mandatory)
Nothing to be noted though
Communication
Half duplex bit serial method Token bus method the communication method
method
differs.
Nothing to be noted though
Transmission Duplex loop - the transmission method
Single bus
method differs.
- Single bus

2-6
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Specifications
MELSECNET/B module MELSECNET/H module Compat- Precautions for
Item
Optical loop Coaxial bus ibility replacement
Twisted pair
(QJ71LP21-25) (QJ71BR11)
(Encoding method)
-
Modulation NRZI coding
method (Encoding (Modulation method) NRZI method Nothing to be noted though
(Encoding method)
method) - the modulation method
Manchester code
differs.
Transmission
HDLC standards (frame format)
format
Error control
CRC(X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over
system
RAS function Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
Occupied I/O Standalone:32 points per slot (I/O 32 points per slot (I/O assignment: intelli.
points assignment: special 32 points) 32 points)

2.2.2 Cable performance comparisons

(1) Optical fiber cable

(a) Overall distance
The overall distance (30km) does not differ according to the optical fiber cable.
(b) Distance between stations
1) SI optical fiber cable
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

MELSECNET ( II ) MELSECNET/H module

Compat- Precautions for
Type module (optical loop)
ibility replacement
(optical loop) 10Mbps 25Mbps
SI optical fiber cable L type 1km 500m 200m
(Type: A-2P-) H type 500m 300m 100m
Refer to*1 below.
SI optical fiber cable
1km 500m 200m
(Type: AN-2P-)
H-PCF optical fiber cable 1km 1km 400m Refer to*2 below.
Broad-band H-PCF optical fiber cable - 1km 1km
QSI optical fiber cable - 1km 1km

*1 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, either change the type of optical
fiber cable, or install a gateway station midway along existing cables.
*2 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, use at a communication speed of
10 Mbps, change the type of optical fiber cable, or install a gateway station midway along existing cables.

2) GI optical fiber cable

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

MELSECNET ( II ) module MELSECNET/H module Compat-

Type Precautions for replacement
(optical loop) (optical loop) ibility

GI optical fiber cable 2km 2km

2-7
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) Coaxial cable

(a) Overall distance
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

MELSECNET ( II ) module MELSECNET/H module Compat-

Type Precautions for replacement
(coaxial loop) (coaxial bus) ibility
3C-2V 10km 300m
Refer to*3 below.
5C-2V 10km 500m

*3 When the overall distance does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, either use an A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
repeater unit in the network, or configure a separate network.

(b) Distance between stations

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

MELSECNET ( II ) module MELSECNET/H module Compat-

Type Precautions for replacement
(coaxial loop) (coaxial bus) ibility
3C-2V 500m 300m
Refer to*4 below.
5C-2V 500m 500m

*4 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, either use an A6BR10/A6BR10-
DC type repeater unit in the network.

Remarks

The following shows the extension method when a repeater unit for the A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system is used.
For details, refer to the Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET/10 Coaxial Bus System type A6BR10/
A6BR10-DC User's Manual (IB-66499).
(1) The distance between stations of 500m (5C-2V) and 300m (3C-2V) can be extended.
Max. 500m (5C-2V)
300m (3C-2V)

CPU BR

R R

A6B
BR R10 CPU BR
QJ71BR11

R R
R Terminal
resistor
Max. 500m (5C-2V)
300m (3C-2V)

(2) Up to four repeater units can be used in a single network.*5

The overall distance can be extended to a maximum distance of 2.5 km.

CPU BR CPU BR CPU BR CPU BR

R R R R

A6B A6B
CPU BR CPU BR R10
R10

R R R R

A6B A6B
R10 R10

R R

CPU BR

Max. 2.5km

*5 It is necessary to add terminal resistor A6RCON-R75 (sold separately).

2-8
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(3) Twisted pair cable

(a) Overall distance, Distance between stations
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
MELSECNET/H module
Communication MELSECNET/B module Compat-
(QJ71NT11B) Precautions for replacement
speed ibility
Twisted pair CC-Link
Twisted pair cable
cable dedicated cable
125kbps 1200m 1200m 1200m
250kbps 600m - - Change the communication speed from 250Kbps to
312kbps - 600m 900m 312Kbps.
500kbps 400m - - Change the communication speed from 500Kbps to
625kbps - 400m 600m 625Kbps.
1Mbps 200m - - Change the communication speed from 1Mbps to
1.25Mbps - 200m 400m 1.25Mbps.
2.5Mbps - 200m -
5Mbps - (Not available) 150m - New function of MELSECNET/H
10Mbps - 100m -

(b) Cable performance

1) Twisted pair cable
Item Specifications (KNPEV-SB 0.5SQ × 1P*1)
Cable type Shielded twisted pair cable
Number of cores 2
Conductive resistance (20°C) 39.4 /km or lower
Insulation resistance (20°C) 10 M/km or higher
Dielectric withstand voltage (V-min) 1000 V AC for one minute
Electrostatic capacity (1kHz) 70 nF/km or less (on average)
Characteristic impedance (100kHz) 110 ± 10

Cross section

*1 The same specifications as the MELSECNET/B twisted pair cable.

To use the existing MELSECNET/B twisted pair cables, process the terminals.
For details, refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (SH-
080049).

2) CC-Link dedicated cable

Product name Mdele name Remark
FANC-110SBH
Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable
FA-CBL200PSBH

2-9
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.3 Functional Comparisons

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat- Precautions for
Item MELSECNET ( II ) module
MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
MELSECNET/B module
• X/Y are used to perform 1:1
communications between the • LX/LY are used to perform 1:1
master station and local communications between the
stations, and the master control station and normal
station and remote I/O stations.
Cyclic transmission
stations. • LB/LW are used to perform
• B/W are used to perform communications between the
communications between the control station and all normal
master station and all local stations.
stations.
• The READ/WRITE/ZNRD/
• The LRDP/LWTP instructions
ZNWR instructions issued
issued from the master station
from the control station are
are used to read/write devices Correct the LRDP/LWTP
used to read/write devices on
on the programmable instructions for reading/
the programmable controller
controller CPU of local writing devices on the
CPU of normal stations.
Transient stations. programmable controller
• Other stations are accessed
transmission • Other stations are accessed CPU of other stations to the
from GX Developer connected
from GX Developer connected READ/WRITE or ZNRD/
to the control station.
to the master station. ZNWR instructions.
• The control station and other
• The master station is (Refer to Section 2.6.2.)
normal stations are accessed
accessed from GX Developer
from GX Developer connected
connected to local stations.
to a normal station.
When a disconnected local When a disconnected normal
Automatic return station returns to normal status, station returns to normal status,
function it is automatically restored and it is automatically restored and
the data link is resumed. the data link is resumed.
In the case of an optical loop
In the case of an optical loop
system and coaxial loop system,
system, faulty parts are
faulty parts are disconnected
disconnected when a fault (e.g.
when a fault (e.g. cable
Loopback function cable disconnection) occurs,
disconnection) occurs, and
and normal operation is
normal operation is continued
continued on operable stations
on operable stations as a result
as a result of the loopback.
of the loopback.
Faulty parts are detected by the Faulty parts are detected by the
Change the devices in the
data of special relays (M9200 to data of link special relays (SB0
Error detection sequence program. (Refer
9255) and special registers to 1FF) and link special registers
to Section 2.6.2.)
(D9200 to 9255). (SW0 to 1FF).
Set the following test items by
the mode setting switch:
Set the following test items by • Self-loopback test
Set the station-to-station
the mode setting switch: • Internal self-loopback test
test and forward loop/
Self-diagnosis test • Self-loopback test • Hardware test
reverse loop test in the
function • Station-to-station test Set the following test items in
network parameter
• Forward loop/reverse loop the network parameters:
settings.
test • Station-to-station test
• Forward loop/reverse loop
test

2 - 10
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.4 Switch Settings Comparisons

(1) Comparison between MELSECNET (II) modules and MELSECNET/H (optical loop and
coaxial bus) modules
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description Compat- Precautions for

Switch name
MELSECNET ( II ) module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
Station number
Sets the station number. Sets the station number.
setting switch
Set the station-to-station
test and forward loop/
Sets the mode for operation or Sets the mode for operation or
Mode select switch reverse loop test in the GX
self-diagnostics test. self-diagnostics test.
Developer network
parameters.

(2) Comparison between MELSECNET/B modules and MELSECNET/H (optical loop and
coaxial bus) modules
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description Compat- Precautions for

Switch name
MELSECNET/B module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
Station number
Sets the station number. Sets the station number.
setting switch
Set the station-to-station
test and forward loop/
Sets the mode for operation or Sets the mode for operation or
Mode select switch reverse loop test in the GX
self-diagnostics test. self-diagnostics test.
Developer network
parameters.
Communication
Sets the communication speed. - The setting is not required.
speed setting switch

(3) Comparison between MELSECNET/B modules and MELSECNET/H (twisted bus)

modules
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description Compat- Precautions for

Switch name
MELSECNET/B module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
A station number is set using the
Station number
Sets the station number. station number/mode setting
setting switch
switch.
A self-diagnostic test is set using
Sets the mode for operation or
Mode select switch the station number/mode setting
self-diagnostics test.
switch.
Set a communication speed
Communication in the network parameter
Sets the communication speed. Sets the communication speed.
speed setting switch dialog box of GX
Developer.

2 - 11
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.5 Parameter Comparisons

2.5.1 Parameter comparisons

The network parameters of MELSECNET (II) are deleted when the programmable controller type is
changed with the GX Developer. After changing the programmable controller type, set the
MELSECNET/H network parameters again.

(1) Replacing MELSECNET (II) with MELSECNET/H

The following shows a comparison between MELSECNET (II) network parameter settings and
MELSECNET/H network parameter settings.
The MELSECNET (II) master station settings are compared with the MELSECNET/H control station
settings, and the MELSECNET (II) local station setting are compared with the MELSECNET/H normal
station settings.
MELSECNET ( II ) MELSECNET/H
Optical loop Optical loop

M 1MP4

L1 L3 1NS1 Network 1 1NS3

L2 1NS2

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Compat-
MELSECNET ( II ) MELSECNET/H Precautions for replacement
ibility
Network type Network type
*1 Starting I/O No.
Starting I/O No.
- (No setting) Network No. Mandatory for the MELSECNET/H.
The total number of stations is 64 at
Total number of (slave) stations Total number of (slave) stations
maximum.
- (No setting) Group No. Mandatory for the MELSECNET/H.
LX/LY assignments on the control
Control station
Master station

station and normal stations

Network range assignments

Network range assignments

LB/LW assignments (first half, Station inherent parameter *2

second half) on the master station Supplemental settings-Secured data

and local stations send *3
Supplemental settings-Secured data
receive
LX/LY assignments on the control
LX/LY assignments on the master station and normal stations
station and local stations
I/O master station specification Mandatory on communications of LX/LY
*1 Refresh parameters
Refresh parameters
Network type*1 Network type

Starting I/O No.*1 Starting I/O No.

Normal station
Local station

Network No. Mandatory for the MELSECNET/H.

- (No setting) Group No. Mandatory for the MELSECNET/H.
Station inherent parameter *2

Refresh parameters*1 Refresh parameters

*1 This is set when the AnU/AnUS(H)/QnA/QnASCPU is mounted.

*2 Applied when LB/LW are set for both the first half/second half on MELSECNET (II). (For details, refer to Section 2.5.2
Example of changing parameters on 2-tier system.)
*3 This is the data separation prevention function for reading/writing cyclic data of two words or more in a single operation.
(For details, refer to Section 2.7 Replacement Precautions.)

2 - 12
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.5.2 Example of changing parameters on 2-tier system

The following shows examples of how to change the LB/LW network parameters when replacing the
MELSECNET (II) with MELSECNET/H.
As MELSECNET (II) has three operation modes, the examples are shown for each operation mode.
• MELSECNET mode
• MELSECNET II mode
• MELSECNET II composite mode

(1) MELSECNET mode

The following shows the procedure for changing the parameters in the case of a MELSECNET mode 2-
tier system configuration.
The MELSECNET master station is replaced with the MELSECNET/H control station, and MELSECNET
local stations are replaced with MELSECNET/H normal stations.
MELSECNET MELSECNET/H
Optical loop
Optical loop
1MP1 Q06HCPU
M A3ACPU

1NS2 Network 1 1NS4

L1 L3

Q02HCPU
A2ACPU 1NS3
L2

(Link parameter setting range)

B/W 0 100 200 300 380 3FF

M L1 L2 L3 Empty

A MELSECNET/H module set as normal station requires network parameter setting. For replacement of
MELSECNET (II) module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding
AnUS(H)CPU), newly set network parameters.

The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET/H.

Common parameter
Refresh parameter
(Network range assignment)

1Mp1
(Refer to example in (c) 2)) (Refer to example in (c) 3))

1Ns2
(Refer to example in (d) 2))

1Ns3
(Refer to example in (d) 2))

1Ns4
(Refer to example in (d) 2))

: Setting required/ : Setting required (Default setting is also acceptable)

2 - 13
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(a) MELSECNET master station

The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET master station (A3ACPU).
1) Network parameter setting (A3ACPU: MELSECNET master station)

2) Network range assignment (A3ACPU: MELSECNET master station)

(b) MELSECNET local station

As all stations perform cyclic communication according to the network range assignments of the
master station (A3ACPU), there are no parameter settings for network range assignment on local
stations.

2 - 14
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(c) MELSECNET/H control station

The following shows the network parameter settings after replacing with the MELSECNET/H control
station (Q06HCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

2) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

3) Refresh parameters (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

2 - 15
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(d) MELSECNET/H normal station

The following shows the network parameter settings after replacing with a MELSECNET/H normal
station (Q02HCPU).
The same parameter settings are required on all normal stations.
1) Network parameter setting (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H normal station)

2) Refresh parameters (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H normal station)

2 - 16
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) MELSECNET II mode

The following shows the procedure for changing the parameters in the case of a MELSECNET II mode
2-tier system configuration.
MELSECNET ( II ) MELSECNET/H
Optical loop

M A3ACPU
Optical loop
L1 L3
1MP1 Q06HCPU
A2ACPU
L2
1NS2 Network 1 1NS4

Q02HCPU
B/W 0 100 200 300 400 800 900 A00 B00 FFF 1NS3
M L1 L2 L3 M L1 L2

Setting range of first Setting range of second

half of link parameters half of link parameters

Each of the MELSECNET II first and second half settings correspond to [Setting1] and [Setting2] set to
all stations according to the "Station inherent parameters" on MELSECNET/H.
(Example) Station inherent parameters of a normal station (1Ns2)
CPU MELSECNET/H (normal station: 1NS2)
Station inherent parameters Common parameters
(LB/LW) (LB/LW)
0 0 000
to 1MP1
FF
100 1MP1
to 1NS2
1FF
1FF
200
to 1NS3 200
Refresh
2FF
300
to 1NS4 1NS2 Send/receive
3FF 3FF data
Each
3FF station

800 800 400

to 1MP1
8FF
900 1NS3
to 1NS2
9FF
5FF
A00
to 1NS3 600
8FF AFF
1NS4

6FF

2 - 17
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

A MELSECNET/H module set as normal station requires network parameter setting. For replacement of
MELSECNET (II) module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding
AnUS(H)CPU), newly set network parameters.

The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET/H.

Common parameter
Station inherent parameter Refresh parameter
(Network range assignment)

1Mp1
(Refer to example in (b) 2)) (Refer to example in (b) 3)) (Refer to example in (b) 4))

1Ns2
(Refer to example in (c) 2)) (Refer to example in (c) 3))

1Ns3
(Refer to example in (c) 2)) (Refer to example in (c) 3))

1Ns4
(Refer to example in (c) 2)) (Refer to example in (c) 3))

: Setting required/ : Setting required (Default setting is also acceptable)

(a) MELSECNET II master station

The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET II master station
(A3ACPU).
1) Network parameter setting (A3ACPU: MELSECNET II master station)

2) Network range assignment (A3ACPU: MELSECNET II master station)

2 - 18
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(b) MELSECNET/H control station

Each of the MELSECNET II first and second half settings correspond to [Setting1] and [Setting2] set
according to the "Station inherent parameters" on MELSECNET/H.
Points when replacing the first and second half of MELSECNET II
MELSECNET sequence programs can be re-used more efficiently by using the station inherent parameters of MELSECNET/H.
The followings describe the points when setting station inherent parameters.
• Set station inherent parameters to all stations.
• As the "station inherent parameter" setting functions cannot be used on basic models (Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU), use the
[Device block replacement] function to change the devices in the first and second half settings to continuous numbers.

1) Network parameter
The network parameter settings of the MELSECNET/H control station (Q06HCPU) are the same
as the parameters when replaced with the MELSECNET mode.
Network parameter setting (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

2) Network range assignment parameter

Set the total number of points in the first half and second half for the common parameters.
Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

2 - 19
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

3) Station inherent parameter

Set the first half in [Setting1] and the second half in [Setting2] as the inherent parameters.
Station inherent parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

4) Refresh parameters
Refresh parameters (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

2 - 20
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(c) MELSECNET/H normal station

1) Network parameter setting
The network parameter settings of MELSECNET/H normal stations (Q02HCPU) are the same as
those of MELSECNET/H normal stations when replaced with the MELSECNET mode. (Refer to
the Section 2.5.2 (1) MELSECNET mode.)
2) Station inherent parameter
For the station inherent parameter settings, settings of the same content as that for the control
stations has to be set to all normal stations.
Station inherent parameter (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H normal station)

3) Refresh parameters
The same parameter settings are required on all normal stations.
Refresh parameters (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H normal station)

2 - 21
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(3) MELSECNET II composite mode

The following shows the procedures for changing the parameters in the case of a MELSECNET II
composite mode 2-tier system configuration on an A3ACPU.
MELSECNET ( II ) MELSECNET/H
Optical loop Optical loop

A3ACPU Q06HCPU
M MELSECNET II mode compatible 1MP1
link modules are used for the M
and L2 stations, and a
Network 1
MELSECNET mode compatible
L1 L2 link module is used for the L1 1NS2 1NS3
station.
A2ACPU Q02HCPU

B/W 0 100 200 300 400 500 FFF

M L1 L2 M L2

Setting range of Setting range

first half of link of second half of
parameters link parameters

A MELSECNET/H module set as normal station requires network parameter setting. For replacement of
MELSECNET (II) module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding
AnUS(H)CPU), newly set network parameters.

The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET/H.

Common parameter
Station inherent parameter Refresh parameter
(Network range assignment)

1Mp1
(Refer to example in (b) 2)) (Refer to example in (b) 3)) (Refer to example in (b) 4))

1Ns2
(Refer to example in (c) 2)) (Refer to example in (c) 3))

1Ns3
(Refer to example in (c) 2)) (Refer to example in (c) 3))

: Setting required/ : Setting required (Default setting is also acceptable)

2 - 22
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(a) MELSECNET II composite mode master station

The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET II composite mode master
station (A3ACPU).
1) Network parameter setting (A3ACPU: MELSECNET II composite mode master station)

2) Network range assignment (A3ACPU: MELSECNET II composite mode master station) : First half

3) Network range assignment (A3ACPU: MELSECNET II composite mode master station) : Second half

2 - 23
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(b) Q06HCPU (control station)

Each of the MELSECNET II first and second half settings correspond to [Setting1] and [Setting2] set
according to the "Station inherent parameters" on MELSECNET/H.
Points when replacing the first and second half of MELSECNET II
MELSECNET sequence programs can be re-used more efficiently by using the station inherent parameters of MELSECNET/H.
The followings describe the points when setting station inherent parameters.
• Set station inherent parameters to all stations.
• As the "station inherent parameter" setting functions cannot be used on basic models (Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU), use the
[Device block replacement] function to change the devices in the first and second half settings to continuous numbers.

1) Network parameter
The network parameter settings of the MELSECNET/H control station (Q06HCPU) are the same
as the parameters when replaced with the MELSECNET mode.
network parameter setting (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

2) Network range assignment parameter

Set the total number of points in the first half and second half for the common parameters.
Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

2 - 24
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

3) Station inherent parameter

Set the first half in [Setting1] and the second half in [Setting2] as the inherent parameters.
Station inherent parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

4) Refresh parameters
Refresh parameters (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

2 - 25
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(c) MELSECNET/H normal station

1) network parameter setting
The network parameter settings of MELSECNET/H normal stations (Q02HCPU) are the same as
those of MELSECNET/H normal stations when replaced with the MELSECNET mode. (Refer to
the MELSECNET mode.)
2) Station inherent parameter
For the station inherent parameter settings, settings of the same content as that for the control
stations has to be set to all normal stations. (Refer to the station inherent parameters of the
MELSECNET/H control station.)
Station inherent parameter (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H normal station)

3) Refresh parameters
The same parameter settings are required on all normal stations.
Refresh parameters (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H normal station)

2 - 26
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.5.3 Example of changing parameters on 3-tier system (When only the first half of
link parameter is set)
The following shows how to change a system on which first half of LB/LW link parameters is set, when
replacing the MELSECNET (II) 3-tier system with MELSECNET/H. Network range assignment of the
present MELSECNET (II) 3-tier system can be used in replacement with MELSECNET/H.
The MELSECNET (II) 2-tier is replaced with the network 1 of MELSECNET/H, and 3-tier is replaced with
the network 2. The MELSECNET (II) master station is replaced with the MELSECNET/H control station,
and MELSECNET local stations are replaced with MELSECNET/H normal stations.
MELSECNET ( II ) MELSECNET/H
Optical loop Optical loop
A3UCPU A2UCPU Q06HCPU Q02HCPU
M L2 1Mp3 1Ns2

MELSECNET (II) MELSECNET/H

2-tier Network1
A3UCPU Q06HCPU

L1/m 1Ns1/2Mp3 Gateway station

MELSECNET (II) MELSECNET/H

3-tier Network2

l1 l2 2Ns1 2Ns2

A2UCPU A2UCPU Q02HCPU Q02HCPU

B/W 0 100 280 380 3FF

Empty

Link parameter of 2-tier M L1/m L2

Link parameter of 3-tier

m l1 l2
master station (L1/m)
100 180 200 280

Concept of MELSECNET (II) 3-tier system replacement

Step 1: Control station (1Mp3) setting
Replace the link parameter setting of MELSECNET (II) 2-tier master station directly with "Network range assignment (Common
parameters)" of MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3.
Step 2: Gateway station (1Ns1/2Mp3) setting
Data transfer between 2 and 3-tier, performed automatically on MELSECNET (II), should be set with parameter setting on
MELSECNET/H. Perform the following settings.

• Replace the link parameter setting of MELSECNET (II) 3-tier master station directly with "Network range assignment (Common
parameters)" of MELSECNET/H network 2 control station 2Mp3.
The range assignment should be performed including the same LB/LW size as that of 1Mp3 to relay the network 1 control
station 1Mp3.
• Set "Refresh parameters" not to duplicate B/W of networks 1 and 2 on the CPU.
• Set data transfer between 2 and 3-tier of MELSECNET (II) in "Interlink transmission parameters" between gateway stations
1Ns1 and 2Mp3.
Step 3: Normal station (1Ns2, 2Ns1, 2Ns2) setting
Set "Refresh parameters" of each normal station (1Ns2, 2Ns1, 2Ns2) on MELSECNET/H networks 1 and 2.

2 - 27
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following shows the flow of MELSECNET/H link data after being replaced from MELSECNET (II).
Flow of LB/LW link data

B/W 0 100 180 200 280 37F 3FF

Network1 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2
1Mp3 1Ns2
CPU 1Ns1

Link refresh

MELSECNET/H LB/LW 0 100 280 37F

Network 1
Control station 1Mp3/ 1Mp3 1Ns1 1Ns2
Normal station 1Ns2
Common parameters

Network1, 2
Cyclic Gateway station
communication 1Ns1/2Mp3
CPU

MELSECNET/H LB/LW 0 100 280 37F

Network 1
1Mp3 1Ns1 1Ns2
Normal station B/W
1Ns1 0

1Mp3

Link refresh 100

Inter link transfer 2Mp3
180
2Ns1
Link refresh 200
Gateway station 2Ns2
280

1Ns2
Link refresh
37F

LB/LW 0 100 180 200 27F

MELSECNET/H
Network 2 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2
Control station 2Mp3
Common parameters 3FF

Cyclic
communication

MELSECNET/H LB/LW 0 180 200 27F

Network 2
2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2
Normal station 2Ns1/
Normal station 2Ns2

Link refresh

B/W 0 100 180 200 27F 3FF

Network2 2Mp3
2Ns1 2Ns2
CPU 1Mp3 2Mp3

[Designation of arrow in the figure]

Cyclic communication

Cyclic Transfers LB/LW which has been set on common parameter to all
communication stations of MELSECNET/H by cyclic communication.

Inter-link data transfer

Inter-link data transfer from module 1 to 2 Transfers LB/LW between modules with
Inter-link data transfer from module 2 to 1 different network numbers mounted to
one CPU.
Link refresh
Transfers LB/LW of MELSECNET/H to the device of CPU.

2 - 28
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Network parameter setting is required for control and normal stations on MELSECNET/H.

The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET/H.

Station
Common parameter
inherent Refresh parameter Inter-link data transfer
(Network range assignment)
parameter

1Mp3 -
(Refer to example in (e) 2)) (Refer to example in (e) 3))

1Ns2 -
(Refer to example in (f) 2))

1Ns1 -
(Refer to example in (g) 2)) (Refer to example in (h) 1))

2Mp3 -
(Refer to example in (g) 3)) (Refer to example in (g) 4))

2Ns1 -
(Refer to example in (i) 2))

2Ns2 -
(Refer to example in (i) 2))

: Setting required/ : Setting required (Default setting is also acceptable)/ -: Setting not required

2 - 29
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(a) MELSECNET (II) 2-tier master station M

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET (II) 2-tier master station M
(A3UCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (A3UCPU: MELSECNET (II) 2-tier master station M)

2) Network range assignment (A3UCPU: MELSECNET (II) 2-tier master station M)

3) Refresh parameter (A3UCPU: MELSECNET (II) 2-tier master station M)

2 - 30
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(b) MELSECNET (II) 2-tier local station L2

As the cyclic communication is performed according to the network range assignments of the 2-tier
master station (A3UCPU), there is no parameter setting for network range assignment on 2-tier local
stations.
(c) MELSECNET (II) 2-tier local station L1/3-tier master station m
The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET (II) 2-tier local station L1/3-
tier master station m (A3UCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (A3UCPU: MELSECNET (II) 2-tier local station L1/3-tier master station m)

2) Network range assignment (A3UCPU: MELSECNET (II) 3-tier master station m)

3) Refresh parameter (A3UCPU: MELSECNET (II) 3-tier master station m)

(d) MELSECNET (II) 3-tier local station l1, l2

As the cyclic communication is performed according to the network range assignments of the 3-tier
master station (A3UCPU), there is no parameter setting for network range assignment on 3-tier local
stations.

2 - 31
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(e) MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3

For MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3, change the settings of MELSECNET (II) 2-tier
master station by:
• Assigning LB/LW to each station by the setting of "Network range assignment (Common
parameters)"
• Performing B/W refreshment by the setting of "Refresh parameters"

MELSECNET/H network 1
CPU Control station 1Mp3

Common parameters
B/W LB/LW

0 0

1Mp3 1Mp3

100 100
2Mp3
180 180
2Ns1 1 Ns1
200 200
2Ns2
Link
280 280
refresh

1Ns2 1Ns2

37F 37F

1FFF 1FFF

2 - 32
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET/H network 1 control station
1Mp3 (Q06HCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3)

2) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3)

3) Refresh parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3)

2 - 33
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(f) MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns2

For MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 that is not gateway station, change the settings
by:
• Performing B/W refreshment by the setting of "Refresh parameters"

MELSECNET/H network 1
CPU Normal station 1Ns2

Common parameters
B/W LB/LW

0 0

1Mp3 1Mp3

100 100
2Mp3
180 180
2Ns1 1 Ns1
200 200
2Ns2
280 Link 280
refresh

1Ns2 1Ns2

37F 37F

1FFF 1FFF

2 - 34
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station
1Ns2 (Q02HCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station)

2) Refresh parameter (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns2)

2 - 35
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(g) MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1/Network 2 control station 2Mp3

(Network range assignment of gateway stations, refresh parameters)
For MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1 that is gateway station, change the settings by:
• Performing B/W refreshment by the setting of "Refresh parameters"*1

For MELSECNET/H network 2 control station 2Mp3 that is gateway station, change the settings of
MELSECNET (II) 3-tier master station by:
• Assigning LB/LW to each station by the setting of "Network range assignment (Common
parameters)"*2
• Assigning B/W refreshment by the setting of "Refresh parameters"*1

MELSECNET/H network 1 MELSECNET/H network 2

Normal station 1Ns1 CPU Control station 2Mp3

Common parameters
LB/LW B/W LB/LW
0 0 0

1Mp3 1Mp3 1Mp3

2Mp3
100 100 100
2Mp3 2Mp3
180 180 180
1Ns1 2Ns1 2Ns1
200 200 200
2Ns2 2Ns2
280 280 27F

1Ns2 1Ns2

37F 37F

1FFF 1FFF 1FFF

Link refresh
*1 Set not to duplicate B/W on the CPU.
*2 Perform the LB/LW assignment for network 2 control station 2Mp3 including the same LB/LW area as that of 1Mp3 to relay
network 1 control station 1Mp3.

2 - 36
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station
1Ns1/network 2 control station 2Mp3 (Q06HCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1/network 2 control
station 2Mp3)

2) Refresh parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1)

3) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 control station 2Mp3)

2 - 37
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4) Refresh parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 control station 2Mp3)

2 - 38
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(h) MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1/network 2 control station 2Mp3 (Inter-link
data transfer of gateway station)
For data transfer between MELSECNET/H networks 1 and 2, change the setting of MELSECNET (II)
2 and 3-tier by:
• Transferring the data between networks 1 and 2 by the setting of “Interlink transmission
parameters” between gateway stations 1Ns1 and 2Mp3

MELSECNET/H network 1 MELSECNET/H network 2

Normal station 1Ns1 Control station 2Mp3

LB/LW LB/LW
0 0

1Mp3 1Mp3
2Mp3
100 100
2Mp3 2Mp3
180 180
1Ns1 2Ns1 2Ns1
200 200
2Ns2 2Ns2
280 27F

1Ns2

37F

1FFF 1FFF

Inter-link data transfer from module 1 to 2

Inter-link data transfer from module 2 to 1

2 - 39
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the inter-link data transfer setting of MELSECNET/H network 1 normal
station 1Ns1/network 2 control station 2Mp3 (Q06HCPU).
1) Inter-link data transfer parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1/network 2
control station 2Mp3)

2 - 40
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(i) MELSECNET/H network 2 normal station 2Ns1, 2Ns2

For MELSECNET/H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1 and 2Ns2, change the settings by:
• Performing B/W refreshment by the setting of "Refresh parameters"

MELSECNET/H network 2
CPU Normal station 2Ns1, 2Ns2
Common parameters
B/W LB/LW
0 0

1Mp3
2Mp3
100
2Mp3
180 180
2Ns1 2Ns1
200 Link 200
refresh
2Ns2 2Ns2
27F 27F

1FFF 1FFF

2 - 41
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET/H network 2 normal stations
2Ns1, 2Ns2 (Q02HCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1, 2Ns2)

2) Refresh parameter (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1, 2Ns2)

2 - 42
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.5.4 Example of changing parameters on 3-tier system (When the first half/second
half of link parameter is set)
The following shows how to change network parameter on LB/LW, when replacing the MELSECNET II
3-tier system with MELSECNET/H. Network range assignment of the present MELSECNET II 3-tier
system is used as it is for replacement with MELSECNET/H.
MELSECNET II 2-tier is replaced with the network 1 of MELSECNET/H, and 3-tier is replaced with the
network 2. The MELSECNET II master station is replaced with the MELSECNET/H control station, and
MELSECNET II local stations are replaced with MELSECNET/H normal stations.
MELSECNET II MELSECNET/H
Optical loop Optical loop
A3UCPU A2UCPU Q06HCPU Q02HCPU

M L2 1Mp3 1Ns2

MELSECNET II MELSECNET/H
2-tier Network1
A3UCPU Q06HCPU
L1/m 1Ns1/2Mp3
Gateway station

MELSECNET II MELSECNET/H
3-tier Network2

l1 l2 2Ns1 2Ns2

A2UCPU A2UCPU Q02HCPU Q02HCPU

B/W 0 100 280 380 400 500 680 780 FFF

Empty

Link parameter of 2-tier M L1/m L2 M L1/m L2 Empty

Link parameter of 3-tier

m l1 l2 m l1 l2
master station (L1/m)
100 180 200 280 500 580 600 680

2 - 43
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Concept of MELSECNET II 3-tier system replacement

Step 1: Control station (1Mp3) setting
Set the link parameter setting on MELSECNET II 2-tier master station as MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3.

• In "Network range assignment (Common parameters)" of control station 1Mp3, set the LB/LW (first half size + second half size)
as a contiguous area on each station.
• It is divided into the first half LB/LW and the second half LB/LW, and transferred depending on the settings 1 and 2 of "Station
inherent parameter".
Step 2: Common parameter and refresh parameter settings of gateway station (1Ns1/2Mp3)
"Common parameter" setting and "Refresh parameter setting" of the MELSECNET II 3-tier master station are set as
MELSECNET/H network 2 control station 2Mp3 and network 1 normal station 1Ns1.

• In "Network range assignment (Common parameters)" of control station 2Mp3, set the LB/LW (first half size + second half size)
as a contiguous area on each station.
The range assignment should be performed including the same LB/LW size as that of 1Mp3 to relay 1Mp3.
• Set "Refresh parameter" to transfer B/W by dividing it into the first half B/W and the second half B/W on each station of network
2 control station 2Mp3 and network 1 normal station 1Ns1.
Make sure that B/W of networks 1 and 2 will not duplicate on the CPU.
• As "Interlink transmission parameters" parameter the gateway station 1Ns1/2Mp3 is set for, do not set a station inherent
parameter.
Step 3: Inter-link data transfer setting of gateway station (1Ns1/2Mp3)
Data transfer between 2 and 3-tier, which is performed automatically on MELSECNET II, is performed by Inter-link data transfer
on gateway station 1Ns1/2Mp3.

• LB/LW area shared by networks 1 and 2 is set by "Interlink transmission parameters" parameter of gateway station between
1Ns1 and 2Mp3.
Step 4: Station setting other than gateway stations (1Ns2, 2Ns1, 2Ns2)
"Station inherent parameter" and "Refresh parameters" of stations excluding gateway stations (1Ns2, 2Ns1, 2Ns2) are set.

• Set "Station inherent parameter" of network 1 normal station 1Ns2 as the same setting as that of network 1 control station
1Mp3.
• Set "Station inherent parameter" of network 2 normal station 2Ns2 as the same setting as that of network 2 normal station
2Ns1.
• Set "Refresh parameter" to refresh all area of common parameters assigned on control stations.

2 - 44
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Data flow between each station of MELSECNET/H is shown at next page.

Flow of LB/LW link data

B/W 0 100 180 200 280 380 400 500 580 600 680 77F 1FFF
Network1
CPU 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 1Ns2 Empty 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 1Ns2

Link refresh

Station inherent parameter

LB/LW 0 100 180 200 280 380 400 500 580 600 680
MELSECNET/H network 1
Control station 1Mp3/
1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 1Ns2 Empty 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 1Ns2
Normal station 1Ns2

Transferred by station
Common inherent parameter
parameters
LB/LW 200 380 500 6FF

1Mp3 1Ns1 1Ns2

Network1,2
Gateway station
Cyclic 1Ns1/2Mp3
communication CPU
Common
parameters
LB/LW 0 200 500 6FF
MELSECNET/H network 1 1Ns1
Normal station 1Ns1 1Mp3 1Ns2
2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2
Link
refresh
Gateway station Inter-link data transfer

Common
parameters
MELSECNET/H network 2 LB/LW 0 100 180 280 300 400 4FF
Control station 2Mp3 1Mp3 2Mp3 1Mp3 2Mp3
2Ns1 2Ns2
2Mp3
Link
refresh
Cyclic
communication Transferred
by refresh
Common parameter
parameters
LB/LW 0 300 400 4FF

2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2

MELSECNET/H network 2
Normal station 2Ns1/
Normal station 2Ns2 Transferred by station
Station inherent
inherent parameter
parameter
LB/LW 0 100 180 200 280 400 500 580 600 67F

1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 Empty 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2

Link refresh

B/W 0 100 180 200 280 400 500 580 600 67F 1FFF
Network2
CPU 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2 Empty 1Mp3 2Mp3 2Ns1 2Ns2

[Designation of arrow in the figure]

Cyclic communication (common parameter)

Cyclic Transfers LB/LW which has been set on common parameter to all stations
communication of MELSECNET/H by cyclic communication.

Transit by station inherent parameter

LB/LW which has been set on common parameter is changed to LB/LW,
inherent to MELSECNET/H station, and transferred.
Inter-link data transfer
Inter-link data transfer from module 1 to 2 Transfers LB/LW between modules with different
Inter-link data transfer from module 2 to 1 network numbers mounted to one CPU.
Link fresh
Transfers LB/LW of MELSECNET/H to the device of CPU.

2 - 45
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Network parameter setting is required for control and normal stations on MELSECNET/H.

The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET/H.

Common parameter
(Network range Station inherent parameter Refresh parameter Inter-link data transfer
assignment)

1Mp3
(Refer to example in (e) 2)) (Refer to example in (e) 3)) (Refer to example in (e) 4))

1Ns2
(Refer to example in (f) 2)) (Refer to example in (f) 3))

1Ns1 -
(Refer to example in (g) 3))
(Refer to example in (g) 5))
2Mp3 -
(Refer to example in (g) 2)) (Refer to example in (g) 4))

2Ns1
(Refer to example in (h) 2)) (Refer to example in (h) 3))

2Ns2
(Refer to example in (h) 2)) (Refer to example in (h) 3))

: Setting required/ : Setting required (Default setting is also acceptable)/ - Setting not required

2 - 46
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(a) MELSECNET II 2-tier master station M

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET II 2-tier master station M
(A3UCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (A3UCPU: MELSECNET II 2-tier master station M)

2) Network range assignment (A3UCPU: MELSECNET II 2-tier master station M)

3) Refresh parameter (A3UCPU: MELSECNET II 2-tier master station M)

(b) MELSECNET II 2-tier local station L2

As the cyclic communication is performed according to the network range assignments of the 2-tier
master station (A3UCPU), there is no parameter setting for network range assignment on 2-tier local
stations.

2 - 47
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(c) MELSECNET II 2-tier local station L1/3-tier master station m (gateway station)
The following describes the network parameter settings of MELSECNET II 2-tier local station L1/3-
tier master station m (A3UCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (A3UCPU: MELSECNET II 2-tier local station L1/3-tier master station m)

2) Network range assignment (A3UCPU: MELSECNET II 3-tier master station m)

3) Refresh parameter (A3UCPU: MELSECNET II 3-tier master station m)

(d) MELSECNET II 3-tier local station l1, l2

As the cyclic communication is performed according to the network range assignments of the 3-tier
master station (A3UCPU), there is no parameter setting for network range assignment on 3-tier local
stations.

2 - 48
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(e) MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3

For MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3, change the settings of MELSECNET II 2-tier
first half/second half setting by:
• Assigning LB/LW (first half + second half size) to each station by the setting of "Network range
assignment (Common parameters)"
• Dividing the data into the first half LB/LW and second half LB/LW and transferring them by the
setting of "Setting1" and "Setting2" of "Station inherent parameter"

MELSECNET/H network 1
CPU Control station 1Mp3
Station inherent parameter Common parameters
B/W LB/LW LB/LW
0 1Mp3
0
1Mp3
0
100 100 1Mp3
2Mp3 2Mp3
180
2Ns1 2Ns1
200 200
2Ns2 2Ns2
280 280
1Ns2 1Ns2
380 380 1Ns1 380
Empty Empty
400 400
1Mp3 1Mp3
500 Link refresh 500 500
2Mp3 2Mp3
580
2Ns1 2Ns1
600 1Ns2
2Ns2 2Ns2
680 680
1Ns2 1Ns2 6FF
77F 77F

1FFF 1FFF 1FFF

Transit by station inherent parameter

2 - 49
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET/H network 1 control station
1Mp3 (Q06HCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3)

2) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3)

2 - 50
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

3) Station inherent parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3)

4) Refresh parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 control station 1Mp3)

2 - 51
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(f) MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns2

For MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns2 that is not gateway station, change the settings
of MELSECNET II 2-tier first half/second half setting by:
• Dividing the data into the first half LB/LW and second half LB/LW and transferring them by setting of
"Setting1" and "Setting2" of "Station inherent parameter"

MELSECNET/H network 1
CPU Normal station 1Ns2
Station inherent parameter Common parameters
B/W LB/LW LB/LW
0 0 0
1Mp3 1Mp3
100 100 1Mp3
2Mp3 2Mp3
180
2Ns1 2Ns1
200 200
2Ns2 2Ns2
280 280
1Ns2 1Ns2
380 380 1Ns1 380
Empty Empty
400 400
1Mp3 1Mp3
500 Link refresh 500 500
2Mp3 2Mp3
580
2Ns1 2Ns1
600 1Ns2
2Ns2 2Ns2
680 680
1Ns2 1Ns2 6FF
77F 77F

1FFF 1FFF 1FFF

Transit by station inherent parameter

2 - 52
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station
1Ns2 (Q02HCPU).

1) Network parameter setting (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns2)

2) Station inherent parameter (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns2)

2 - 53
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

3) Refresh parameter (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns2)

2 - 54
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(g) MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1/network 2 control station 2Mp3 (gateway
station)
For data transfer between MELSECNET/H networks 1 and 2, change the setting of MELSECNET II 2
and 3-tier by:
• Assigning LB/LW of network 2 control station 2Mp3 including LB/LW size of network 1 control
station 1Mp3 by the setting of "Network range assignment (Common parameters)" on network 2
control station 2Mp3
• Transferring the data between networks 1 and 2 by the setting of "Interlink transmission
parameters" between gateway stations 1Ns1 and 2Mp3

MELSECNET/H network 1 MELSECNET/H network 2

Normal station 1Ns1 Control station 2Mp3
Common parameters
LB/LW LB/LW
0 0
1Mp3
100 1Mp3 100
2Mp3
2Mp3 180
200 1Mp3
2Mp3
280 280
2Ns1 2Mp3
300 300
2Ns2
380 1Ns1 2Ns1 380
2Mp3
400 400
2Ns1
480 2Ns2 480
2Ns2
500 4FF

1Ns2

6FF

1FFF 1FFF

Inter-link data transfer from module 1 to 2

Inter-link data transfer from module 2 to 1

2 - 55
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

For MELSECNET/H normal station 1Ns1 that is gateway station, change the settings of
MELSECNET II 2-tier first half/second half settings by:
• Dividing the data into the first half and second half and refreshing them by the setting of "Refresh
parameters"*1
Also, for MELSECNET/H control station 2Mp3 of gateway station, change the settings of
MELSECNET II 3-tier first half/second half settings by:
• Assigning LB/LW (first + last size) to each station by the setting of "Network range assignment
(Common parameters)"*2
• Dividing the data into the first half and second half and refreshing them by the setting of "Refresh
parameters"*1

MELSECNET/H network 1 MELSECNET/H network 2

Normal station 1Ns1 CPU Control station 2Mp3
Common parameters
LB/LW B/W LB/LW
0 0 0
1Mp3 1Mp3
100 1Mp3 100 100
2Mp3 2Mp3
180 2Mp3 180
2Ns1
200 200 1Mp3
2Ns2
280 280
2Mp3
1Ns2 300
1Ns1 380 2Ns1 380
Empty
400 400
1Mp3 2Ns2 480
500 500 4FF
2Mp3
580
2Ns1
600 1Ns2 600
2Ns2
680
6FF 1Ns2
77F

1FFF 1FFF 1FFF

Link refresh
*1 Set not to duplicate B/W on the CPU.
*2 Perform the LB/LW assignment for network 2 control station 2Mp3 including the same LB/LW area as that of 1Mp3 to relay
network 1 control station 1Mp3.

2 - 56
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station
1Ns1/network 2 control station 2Mp3 (Q06HCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1/network 2 control
station 2Mp3)

2) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 control station 2Mp3)

2 - 57
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

3) Refresh parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1)

4) Refresh parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 control station 2Mp3)

2 - 58
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

5) Inter-link data transfer parameter (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 1 normal station 1Ns1/network 2
control station 2Mp3)

2 - 59
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(h) MELSECNET/H network 2 normal station 2Ns1, 2Ns2

For MELSECNET/H network 2 normal station 2Ns1, 2Ns2 that is not gateway station, change the
settings of MELSECNET II 2-tier first half/second half setting by:
• Dividing the data into the first half LB/LW and second half LB/LW and transferring them by the
setting of "Setting1" and "Setting2" of "Station inherent parameter"
MELSECNET/H network 2
CPU Normal station 2Ns1, 2Ns2
Station inherent parameter Common parameters
B/W LB/LW LB/LW
0
0 0
1Mp3 1Mp3
100 100
2Mp3 2Mp3
180 180 2Mp3 180
2Ns1 2Ns1
200 200
2Ns2 2Ns2
280 280
300
Empty Empty
2Ns1 380
400 400 400
1Mp3 1Mp3 2Ns2 480
Link
500 500 4FF
2Mp3 refresh 2Mp3
580 580
2Ns1 2Ns1
600 600
2Ns2 2Ns2
67F 67F

1FFF 1FFF 1FFF

Transit by station inherent parameter

2 - 60
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

The following describes the network parameter setting of MELSECNET/H network 1 normal stations
2Ns1, 2Ns2 (Q02HCPU).
1) Network parameter setting (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1, 2Ns2)

2) Station inherent parameter (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1, 2Ns2)

2 - 61
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

3) Refresh parameter (Q02HCPU: MELSECNET/H network 2 normal stations 2Ns1, 2Ns2)

2 - 62
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.6 Program Comparisons

2.6.1 Comparison of special relays M (SB) and special registers D (SW)

(1) Master station special relays

Special relays enabled when host station is the master station.
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Special relay in the case of MELSECNET (II)
Corresponding MELSECNET/H special relay
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
Delete when used in a
LRDP instruction OFF : Not accepted sequence program.
M9200 None - -
received ON : Accepted (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
Delete when used in a
LRDP instruction OFF : Not completed sequence program.
M9201 None - -
complete ON : Completed (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
Delete when used in a
LWTP instruction OFF : Not accepted sequence program.
M9202 None - -
received ON : Accepted (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
Delete when used in a
LWTP instruction OFF : Not completed sequence program.
M9203 None - -
complete ON : Completed (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
OFF : Parameter
Link parameter OFF : Normal Receive parameter normal
M9206 SB0055
error in the host ON : Abnormal error ON : Parameter
abnormal
Delete when used in a
Link parameter OFF : Match sequence program as a
M9207 None - -
check results ON : Mismatch 3-tier system cannot be
configured.
Master station B,W OFF : Transmits to Delete when used in a
transmission range tier2 and tier3 sequence program as a
M9208 None - -
setting (only master ON : Transmits to 3-tier system cannot be
station of lower link) tier2 only configured.
Check instructions OFF : Executing the Delete when used in a
of link parameters check function sequence program as a
M9209 None - -
(only master station ON : Check non- 3-tier system cannot be
of lower link) execution configured.
Link card error (for OFF : Normal OFF : Normal
M9210 SB0020 Module status
master station) ON : Abnormal ON : Abnormal
OFF : Online
ON : Offline, station- OFF : Online
M9224 Link status to-station test, SB0043 Online switch ON : Other than
or self-loopback online
test
When ON, confirm the
loop status by SW0090.
OFF : Normal The loop status can
SB0090 Host loop status
ON : Abnormal also be judged by the
host station bits of
OFF : Normal SW0091 to SW0094.
M9225 Forward loop error
ON : Abnormal SB0092
(when host
Forward loop status
station is OFF : Normal
of the remote
remote ON : Abnormal
master station
master
station)

(to next page)

2 - 63
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special relay in the case of MELSECNET (II)
Corresponding MELSECNET/H special relay
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
When ON, confirm the
loop status by SW0090.
OFF : Normal The loop status can
SB0090 Host loop status
ON : Abnormal also be judged by the
host station bits of
OFF : Normal SW0095 to SW0098.
M9226 Reverse loop error
ON : Abnormal SB0096
(when host Reverse loop
station is status of the OFF : Normal
remote remote master ON : Abnormal
master station
station)
OFF : Not being
executed
ON : Forward loop
Offline test OFF : Not instructed
M9227 Loop test status test/reverse SB00AC
instruction status ON : Instructed
loop test
execution
underway
OFF : All stations
RUN or STEP
OFF : RUN or STEP
RUN status
Local station RUN status Each station CPU
M9232 SB0084 ON : Stations in the
operation status ON : STOP or PAUSE RUN status
STOP or
status
PAUSE status
exist
Local station error OFF : No error Can be substituted by
M9233 None - -
detection status ON : Error detection SB0074.
OFF : No station
detected
Local station, parameter
remote I/O station OFF : No error Parameter status errors
M9235 SB007C
parameter error ON : Error detection of each station ON : A station
detection status detected
parameter
errors
OFF : Parameter
Local station,
OFF : No communication
remote I/O station
communication Parameter status not in progress
M9236 initial SB0078
ON : Communication of each station ON : Parameter
communications
in progress communication
status
in progress
OFF : All stations
normal
Local station, Cyclic transmission ON : Station where
OFF : Normal
M9237 remote I/O station SB0074 status of each cyclic
ON : Abnormal
error station transmission is
not executing
exist
OFF : All stations
Forward loop normal
SB0091
Local station, status ON : Faulty station
remote I/O station OFF : Normal present
M9238
forward/reverse ON : Abnormal OFF : All stations
loop error Reverse loop normal
SB0095
status ON : Faulty station
present

2 - 64
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) Local station special relay

Special relays enabled when host station is the local station.
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special relay in the case of MELSECNET (II) local

MELSECNET/H special relay
station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
Delete when used in a
LRDP instruction OFF : Not completed sequence program.
M9204 None - -
complete ON : Completed (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
Delete when used in a
LWTP instruction OFF : Not completed sequence program.
M9205 None - -
complete ON : Completed (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
Link card error (for OFF : Normal OFF : Normal
M9211 SB0020 Module status
local station) ON : Abnormal ON : Abnormal
OFF : Online
ON : Offline, station- OFF : Online
M9240 Link status to-station test, SB0043 Online switch ON : Other than
or self-loopback online
test
When ON, confirm the
loop status by SW0090.
OFF : Normal OFF : Normal The loop status can
M9241 Forward loop error SB0090 Host loop status
ON : Abnormal ON : Abnormal also be judged by the
host station bits of
SW0091 to SW0094.
When ON, confirm the
loop status by SW0090.
OFF : Normal OFF : Normal The loop status can
M9242 Reverse loop error SB0090 Host loop status
ON : Abnormal ON : Abnormal also be judged by the
host station bits of
SW0095 to SW0098.
When ON, confirm the
loop status by SW0090.
OFF : Loopback not
The loop status can
Loopback executed OFF : Normal
M9243 SB0090 Host loop status also be judged by
execution ON : Loopback ON : Abnormal
whether SW0099 and
execution
SW009A are the host
station No.
Delete when used in a
Data not received OFF : Received sequence program as a
M9246 None - -
from master station ON : Not received 3-tier system cannot be
configured.
Delete when used in a
Data not received
OFF : Received sequence program as a
M9247 from the upper loop None - -
ON : Not received 3-tier system cannot be
in 3-tier system
configured.
OFF : Receive
Parameter OFF : Received Parameter receive
M9250 SB0054 completed
unreceived ON : Not received status
ON : Not received
OFF : Normal Host station data OFF : Normal
M9251 Link break SB0049
ON : Cancel link status ON : Abnormal
OFF : Not being
executed
ON : Forward loop Offline testing
OFF : No response
M9252 Loop test status test/reverse SB00AE response
ON : Response
loop test designation
execution
underway

(to next page)

2 - 65
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special relay in the case of MELSECNET (II) local
MELSECNET/H special relay
station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
When the
MELSECNET II master
station is the
MELSECNET/H
OFF : RUN or STEP
Stores the CPU specified control
Master station RUN status SW0084 to Each station CPU
M9253 RUN status of each station, the operation
operation status ON : STOP or PAUSE SW0087 RUN status
station. status is distinguished
status
by the corresponding
bit of the control station
specified on SW0084 to
SW0087.
OFF : All stations
RUN or STEP
OFF : RUN or STEP
RUN status
Operating status of RUN status Each station CPU
M9254 SB0084 ON : Stations in the
other local stations ON : STOP or PAUSE RUN status
STOP or
status
PAUSE status
exist
OFF : All stations
normal
ON : Station where
Local station error Cyclic transmission
OFF : Normal cyclic
M9255 on stations other SB0074 status of each
ON : Abnormal transmission
than host station station
is not
executing
exist

2 - 66
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(3) Master station special register

Special register enabled when host station is the master station.
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special register in the case of MELSECNET (II)

MELSECNET/H special register
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
0: Normal completion
2: LRDP instruction
setting fault Delete when used in a
LRDP processing 3: Error at relevant sequence program.
D9200 None - -
results station (Refer to Section 2.6.2
4: Relevant station Transient instructions.)
LRDP execution
disabled
0: Normal completion
2: LWTP instruction
setting fault Delete when used in a
LWTP processing 3: Error at relevant sequence program.
D9201 None - -
results station (Refer to Section 2.6.2
4: Relevant station Transient instructions.)
LRDP execution
disabled
D9202 Stores whether or not
D9203 the slave station is a Delete when used in a
D9241 Local station link MELSECNET sequence program due
None - -
type compatible station or a to MELSECNET/H
D9242 MELSECNET II system.
compatible station.
0: Forward loop,
during data link
1: Reverse loop,
0: Normal
during data link
1: Stop instruction
2: Loopback
issued
implemented in Check whether or not
2: No common
forward/reverse SW0049 the data link is normally
parameters
directions (SW0090 Cause of data link SW0049.
D9204 Link status 3: Common
3: Loopback to transmission stop (Loop status is judged
parameter error
implemented in SW009A) comprehensively by
4: Host station
only forward SW0090 to SW009A.)
CPU error
direction
6: Communication
4: Loopback
canceled
implemented only
in reverse direction
5: Data link disabled
Stores the number
Station Station that
Loopback station of stations executing
D9205 implementing implemented forward SW0099
(forward loop side) the loopback on the
loopback loopback
forward loop side.
Stores the number
Station Station that
Loopback station of stations executing
D9206 implementing implemented reverse SW009A
(reverse loop side) the loopback on the
loopback loopback
reverse loop side.
D9207 Max. value SW006B Max. value
D9208 Link scan time Min. value SW006C Link scan time Min. value
D9209 Current value SW006D Current value
Accumulates and The retries on the
Number of retries
stores the number of forward loop side are
SW00C8 on the forward loop
retries on the stored as a cumulative
side
Stored as cumulative forward loop side. value.
D9210 Retry
value Accumulates and The retries on the
Number of retries
stores the number of reverse loop side are
SW00C9 on the reverse loop
retries on the stored as a cumulative
side
reverse loop side. value.

(to next page)

2 - 67
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special register in the case of MELSECNET (II)
MELSECNET/H special register
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
Accumulates and
Loop switching Stored as cumulative Loop switching stores the number of
D9211 SW00CE
count value count loop checks
conducted.
D9212 SW0084
Stores local stations in Stores the CPU
D9213 Local station SW0085 Each station CPU
a STOP or PAUSE RUN status of each
D9214 operation status SW0086 RUN status
status. station.
D9215 SW0087
D9216 Stores whether each
D9217 Local station error local station has Can be substituted by
None - -
D9218 detection status detected any error in SW0074 to SW0077.
D9219 other station.
D9220 Local station Turns ON when a local SW007C
D9221 parameter station or a remote I/O SW007D
Parameter error Stores the
D9222 mismatch station has detected SW007E status of each parameter status of
Remote I/O station an error on the link
station each station.
D9223 I/O assignment parameters from the SW007F
error master station.
D9224 Local station, SW0078
Stores stations that are Parameter Stores the
D9225 remote I/O station SW0079
performing communication communication
D9226 initial
communication of link SW007A status of each status of each
communication
D9227 parameters. SW007B station station parameters.
underway
D9228 SW0074
Local station, Cyclic transmission Stores the cyclic
D9229 Stores data link error SW0075
remote I/O station status of each transmission status
D9230 stations. SW0076
error station of each station.
D9231 SW0077
D9232 SW0091
Stores the forward The error on the loop
D9233 SW0092 Forward loop status
loop status of each line of the forward loop
D9234 Stores the station that SW0093 of each station
Local station and station. is stored.
D9235 detected the error on SW0094
remote I/O station
D9236 the forward loop line SW0095
loop error Reverse loop Stores the reverse The error on the loop
D9237 and reverse loop line. SW0096
status of each loop status of each line of the reverse loop
D9238 SW0097
station station. is stored.
D9239 SW0098
Number of receive The error count for
Stores cumulative total SW00B8 to Various error Various error
D9240 error detection each error cause is
of receive errors SW00C7 counters counters
times stored.

2 - 68
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(4) Local station special register

Special registers enabled when host station is a local station
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special register in the case of MELSECNET (II)

MELSECNET/H special register
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
Station number
Stores the station Stores the station
D9243 information for host SW0042 Station No.
number. (0 to 64) number of the host.
station
Stores the total
Number of link Stores number of slave Total number of link number of link
D9244 SW0056
device stations stations. stations stations that is set
with the parameters.
Number of receive The error count for
Stores cumulative total SW00B8 to Various error Various error
D9245 error detection each error cause is
of receive errors. SW00C7 counters counters
times stored.
D9248 SW0084
D9249 Stores local stations in SW0085 Stores the CPU
Local station Each station CPU
a STOP or PAUSE RUN status of each
D9250 operation status SW0086 RUN status
status. station.
D9251 SW0087
D9252 SW0074
D9253 Stores the local station SW0075 Cyclic transmission Stores the cyclic
Local station error
number other than the status of each transmission status
D9254 status
host, which is in error. SW0076 station of each station.
D9255 SW0077

2 - 69
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.6.2 Transient instructions

(1) MELSECNET II dedicated instruction

Dedicated instructions that were used on MELSECNET II need to be replaced with the following
dedicated instructions on MELSECNET/H.
The table below shows a comparison between dedicated instructions on MELSECNET II and dedicated
instructions on MELSECNET/H. The table also shows reference items in the Q Corresponding
MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC Network). Check these reference
items before changing the sequence program.
MELSECNET II MELSECNET/H Reference
Instruction Instruction item in the
Category Description Category Description
name name manual
READ Other station Reads device data on other Section
The master station
SREAD word device read stations of target network No. 7.4.5
Reading from reads the word
LRDP Reads device data on other
local station devices (T, C, D, W) Other station Section
ZNRD stations of target network No.
on local stations. word device read 7.4.5
by A-compatible instructions.
Other station Writes data to devices on
WRITE Section
word device other stations of target
The master station SWRITE 7.4.5
write network No.
Writing to local writes to the word
LWTP Writes data to devices on
station devices (T, C, D, W) Other station
other stations of target Section
on local stations. ZNWR word device
network No. by A-compatible 7.4.5
write
instructions.

The following describes operation by the instructions.

: Can be used, ×: Cannot be used

Execution Target
station station
Instruction Name Description QnA/ AnU/
QCPU QCPU QnAS AnUS(H)
CPU CPU
Reads CPU device data on target stations of target network No.
(in 16-bit units)

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other Channel 1 Word device

READ READ Channel 2
station word Channel 3 ×
SREAD
device read Channel 4 2594
Word device Channel 5
2594 Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Writes data to CPU device on target station of target network

No. (in 16-bit units)
(Devices on the target station can be turned ON by SWRITE.)

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other
WRITE Channel 1 Word device
station word Channel 2 ×
SWRITE Channel 3
device write
WRITE Channel 4 361
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

(to next page)

2 - 70
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

: Can be used, × : Cannot be used

Execution Target
station station
Instruction Name Description QnA/ AnU/
QCPU QCPU QnAS AnUS(H)
CPU CPU
[A-compatible instruction]
Reads CPU device data on target stations of target network No.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other Channel 1 Word device *1

ZNRD * Fixed
ZNRD station word AnACPU
device read 2594 AnNCPU
Word device
2594

[A-compatible instruction]
Writes data to CPU device on target station of target network
No.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other *1
Word device
ZNWR station word Channel 2 AnACPU
device write * Fixed
AnNCPU
ZNWR 361

*1 CPU modules of the following version or later when the target station is the A2UCPU(S1), A3UCPU, A4UCPU, or
A2USCPU(S1)
• A2UCPU(S1), A3UCPU, A4UCPU: Version AY (manufactured in July 1995) or later
• A2USCPU(S1): Version CP (manufactured in July 1995) or later

2 - 71
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2.7 Replacement Precautions

The following shows the replacement precautions when replacing MELSECNET (II) with MELSECNET/
H.

(1) Cables
For details on precautions for optical cables and coaxial cables, refer to Section 2.2.2 Cable
performance comparisons.

(2) System configuration

(a) System configuration using local stations and remote I/O stations in MELSECNET mode
and MELSECNET II mode
MELSECNET/H system, which is a composite system comprising local stations and remote stations,
provides high-performance functions by making a separation between local stations and remote
stations. It therefore cannot be configured by a mixture of local stations and remote stations. For this
reason, in a MELSECNET (II) system, when replacing a system, which comprises a mixture of local
stations and remote I/O stations connected to a single master station, with a MELSEC/H system, the
following system configuration is necessary. Normal stations are connected to a single control
station, and remote I/O stations are controlled by an additional remote master station (the control
station in a remote I/O system is defined as the "remote master station"). The following shows a
system configuration example.
For a parameter change example, refer to Section 3.5.2.
System configuration using local and remote stations (optical)
MELSECNET ( II ) (optical) MELSECNET/H (optical) Remarks (proposed measure)
Optical loop Optical loop • The control station of network No.1
M configures a PLC to PLC network that

1MP4/
controls normal station 1 and normal
1NS1 Network Network 2R3
1
2MR
2 station 2.
L1 R3
• The other network module becomes the
1NS2
remote master station, and the remote I/O
L2
network system of No.2 is configured.

(b) MELSECNET (II) system comprising 65 connected modules

The maximum number of stations on the MELSECNET/H system is 64 (one control station, 63
normal stations).
The maximum number of stations on the MELSECNET (II) system is 65 (one master station, 64 local
stations + remote I/O stations). For this reason, when the maximum number of 65 MELSECNET/H
modules are connected, measures (e.g. division into two networks of 64 modules or less having a
different network No.) are required.

2 - 72
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(3) Sequence program

(a) Data separation prevention
When two words (32 bits) or more of cyclic data are handled, the old data sometimes is mixed with
the new data. To read/write cyclic data of two words or more in a single operation, set data separation
prevention by the following method.
1) Interlock program using BW
Data separation can be prevented by performing handshaking using BW between the cyclic data
sending station and cyclic data receiving station.
The following shows an example of an interlock program for handshaking.

When handling data larger than two words (32 bits) at one time without using the 32-bit
data guarantee function or the block guarantee per station function, the data may split
into new and old data coexisting in one word (16 bits) units.
As in the example below, the program should be interlocked using the oldest number
of either the link relay (B).

Sending station Receiving station

1) 2) 4) 5)
3) 6)
7)

1) The send command turns on.

2) The contents of D0 to D2 are stored in W0 to W2.
3) Upon completion of storage in W0 to W2, B0 for handshaking turns on.
4) By cyclic transmission, the link relay (B) is sent after the link register
(W), which turns on B0 of the receiving station.
5) The contents of W0 to W2 are stored in D100 to D102.
6) Upon completion of storage in D100 to D102, B100 for handshaking
turns on.
7) When the data is transmitted to the receiving station, B0 turns off.

2 - 73
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

2) Per-station block guarantee function

When the "interlock program using BW" in 1) cannot be made, use the per-station block
guarantee function for MELSECNET/H cyclic data. By enabling the per-station block guarantee
function, handshaking is performed between CPU modules and network modules to refresh the
network, and enables data separation prevention of cyclic data per station. The per-station block
guarantee function is enabled when "Secured data send" and "Secured data receive" in the
following parameters are set.

(b) BW first half/second half assignments in the MELSECNET II mode and composite mode
Set the station inherent parameters of the MELSECNET/H to all stations to re-use MELSECNET II
sequence programs more efficiently. Note, however, that as the "station inherent parameter" setting
functions cannot be used on basic models (Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU), use the [Device block
replacement] function to change the devices in the first and second half settings to continuous
numbers.
(c) Processing time
The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series and the Q series.
For details on processing times, refer to the manual for the respective module.

2 - 74
2 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(4) Precautions for system where AnN/AnS/AnACPU are mixed.

Pay attention to the following when replacing the MELSECNET II system where AnN/AnA/AnSCPU
(excluding AnUS(H)CPU) are mixed, with the MELSECNET/10 system.
Refer to "Chapter 11 COMPOSITE SYSTEMS" in "Type MELSECNET/10 Network system (PLC to PLC
network) Reference Manual", for details.
(a) Control station of the MELSECNET/10 system
MELSECNET/10 system after transition requires one AnU/AnUS(H)/QnA/QnAS/QCPU as a control
station.
In addition, because AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU) cannot be a sub-control station in
the transition to MELSECNET/10, the MELSECNET/10 system after transition requires two or more
AnU/AnUS(H)/QnA/QnAS/QCPU to use the control station shift function of MELSECNET/10.
(b) Device range where data link can be executed on the MELSECNET/10 system
Device range where data link can be executed on the MELSECNET/10 system is the device range of
AnN/AnS/AnACPU to be connected.
X/Y B/Y
AnN/AnSCPU (excluding
Maximum 0000 to 07FF*1 0000 to 03FF
AnUS(H)CPU)
AnACPU Maximum 0000 to 07FF*2 0000 to 0FFF

*1 For A3NCPU. Depends on the number of I/O points that can be controlled by AnN/AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU).
*2 For A3ACPU. Depends on the number of I/O points that can be controlled by AnACPU.

(c) When AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU) are mixed in transition from

MELSECNET II composite mode to MELSECNET/10
Communicable B/W range is 0 to 3FF when AnN/AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU) are mixed on
MELSECNET/10.
When the second half is set on the MELSECNET II composite mode, it is necessary to divide with
station inherent parameter for transferring data, but the station inherent parameter cannot be set on
AnN/AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU).
AnACPU can communicate at the range of B/W0 to FFF, but station inherent parameter cannot be
set.
From here onwards, it may cause a communication error of the area divided by station inherent
parameter at the other station where transmission of B/W 400 or later cannot be made.
When replacing MELSECNET II composite mode with MELSECNET/10 where AnN/AnA/AnSCPU
(excluding AnUS(H)CPU) are mixed, replace AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU) with a
CPU that is applicable to MELSECNET/10, such as QCPU.

2 - 75
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II)

3

AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.1 List of MELSECNET (II) and /B Alternative Models

(1) Replacement of MELSECNET (II) modules with MELSECNET/H modules

Network type A/AnS/A0J2(H) series Alternative models for Q series
A1NCPUP21
A2NCPUP21
A2NCPUP21-S1
A3NCPUP21
Optical loop CPU module + QJ71LP21-25 (Optical loop: SI cable
A2ACPUP21
(CPU integrated type) supported)
A2ACPUP21-S1
A3ACPUP21
A2CCPUP21
A0J2HCPUP21
A1NCPUP21-S3
A2NCPUP21-S3
A2NCPUP21-S4
Optical loop CPU module + QJ71LP21G (Optical loop: GI cable
A3NCPUP21-S3
(CPU integrated type) supported)
A2ACPUP21-S3
A2ACPUP21-S4
A3ACPUP21-S3
A1NCPUR21
A2NCPUR21
A2NCPUR21-S1
A3NCPUR21
Coaxial loop
A2ACPUR21 CPU module + QJ71BR11 (Coaxial bus)
(CPU integrated type)
A2ACPUR21-S1
A3ACPUR21
A2CCPUR21
A0J2HCPUR21
AJ71AP21
Optical loop (Standalone) QJ71LP21-25 (Optical loop: SI cable supported)
A1SJ71AP21
AJ71P21-S3
AJ71AP21-S3
Optical loop (Standalone) AJ71P22-S3 QJ71LP21G (Optical loop: GI cable supported)
AJ71AP22-S3
A1SJ71AP21-S3
AJ71AR21
Coaxial loop (Standalone) QJ71BR11 (Coaxial bus)
A1SJ71AR21
Optical loop (Standalone) AJ72P25
QJ72LP25-25 (Optical loop: SI cable supported)
(Remote I/O station) AJ72P25-S1
Optical loop (Standalone) AJ72P25-S3
QJ72LP25G (Optical loop: GI cable supported)
(Remote I/O station) A0J2P25
AJ72R25
Coaxial loop (Standalone)
AJ72R25-S1 QJ72BR15 (Coaxial bus)
(Remote I/O station)
A0J2R25

3-1
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Replacement of MELSECNET/B modules with MELSECNET/H modules

Network type A/AnS series Alternative models for Q series
AJ71AT21B QJ71LP21-25 (Optical loop)
Twisted pair
A1SJ71AT21B QJ71BR11 (Coaxial bus)
AJ72T25B QJ72LP25-25 (Optical loop)
Twisted pair
A1SJ72T25B QJ72BR15 (Coaxial bus)

3-2
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.2 Performance Specifications Comparisons

3.2.1 Module performance Compatibility comparisons

(1) Comparison between MELSECNET (II) module (optical loop) and MELSECNET/H module
(optical loop)
(a) SI optical cable, H-PCF optical cable
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Specifications
MELSECNET (II) module MELSECNET/H module Compat-
Item Precautions for replacement
Optical loop ibility
Optical loop
(QJ71LP21-25, QJ72LP25-25)
Max. 2048 points and max. number of
X/Y I/O points of CPU module on master 8192 points
station
Maximum 16384 points
number of (Remote master station  remote I/O
B -
link points station: 8192 points, remote I/O station 
per remote master station: 8192 points)
network 16384 points
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points
(Remote master station  remote I/O
W • (MELSECNET II composite mode)
station: 8192 points, remote I/O station 
4096 points
remote master station: 8192 points)
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 bytes Remote master station  remote I/O
Maximum Master
• (MELSECNET II composite mode) station
number of station
First half: 1024 bytes {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
link points
Remote Remote I/O station  remote master
per
I/O 512 bytes station
station
station {(LX + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of
512 points 4096 points
I/O points per station
Communication
1.25 Mbps 25Mbps/10Mbps
speed
Number of stations
65 stations (Master station: 1, local 65 stations (Remote master station: 1, Set the PLC to PLC network to
connected in one
station + remote I/O station: 64) remote I/O station: 64) a separate network.
network
SI optical cable When using existing SI cables,
SI optical cable H-PCF optical cable the distance between stations
Applicable cable
H-PCF optical cable Broad-band H-PCF optical cable may be shortened.
QSI optical cable (Refer to Section 3.2.2.)
Overall distance 10km 30km
To ensure the same distance
as before replacement, either
Distance between
Refer to Section 3.2.2. Refer to Section 3.2.2. change the optical cable, or
stations
install a gateway station
midway along existing cables.
Maximum number of New MELSECNET/H
- 239
networks parameter (mandatory)
Communication Nothing to be noted though the
Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method
method communication method differs.
Transmission
Duplex loop
method
Modulation method Nothing to be noted though the
(Modulation method) CMI method (Encoding method) NRZI coding
(Encoding method) modulation method differs.
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X6+1) and retry by a time over
• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable
RAS function
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
(Master station) When the master station is
(Master station)
Number of occupied CPU integrated type: 0 point replaced from a CPU
32 points per slot (I/O assignment: intelli.
I/O points Standalone:32 points per slot (I/O integrated type, one new slot
32 points)
assignment: special 32 points) (32 points) is required.

3-3
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(b) Modules for GI optical cable

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Compat-
Item MELSECNET (II) module MELSECNET/H module Precautions for replacement
ibility
Optical loop Optical loop(QJ71LP21G, QJ72LP25G)
Max. 2048 points and max. number of
X/Y I/O points of CPU module on master 8192 points
station
16384 points
Maximum (Remote master station  remote I/O
number of B - station: 8192 points,
link points remote I/O station  remote master
per station: 8192 points)
network 16384 points
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points (Remote master station  remote I/O
W • (MELSECNET II composite mode) station: 8192 points,
4096 points remote I/O station  remote master
station: 8192 points)
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 bytes
Remote master station  remote I/O
Maximum Master • (MELSECNET II composite mode)
station
number of station link parameter First half: 1024 bytes
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
link points link parameter Second half: 1024 bytes
per Remote Remote I/O station  remote master
station I/O 512 bytes station
station {(LX + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of
512 points 4096 points
I/O points per station
Communication
1.25 Mbps 10 Mbps
speed
Number of stations
65 stations (Master station: 1, local 65 stations (Remote master station: 1, Set the PLC to PLC network to
connected in one
station + remote I/O station: 64) remote I/O station: 64) a separate network.
network
Applicable cable GI optical cable GI optical cable
Overall distance 10 km 30 km
Distance between
GI optical cable: 2km GI optical cable: 2km
stations
Maximum number of New MELSECNET/H
- 239
networks parameter (mandatory)
Communication Nothing to be noted though the
Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method
method communication method differs.
Transmission
Duplex loop
method
Modulation method Nothing to be noted though the
(Modulation method) CMI method (Encoding method) NRZI coding
(Encoding method) modulation method differs.
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over
• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable
RAS function
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
(Master station) When the master station is
(Master station)
Number of occupied CPU integrated type: 0 point replaced from a CPU
32 points per slot (I/O assignment: intelli.
I/O points Standalone:32 points per slot (I/O integrated type, one new slot
32 points)
assignment: special 32 points) (32 points) is required.

3-4
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Comparison between MELSECNET (II) module (coaxial loop) and MELSECNET/H
module (coaxial bus)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
Compat-
Item MELSECNET (II) module MELSECNET/H module Precautions for replacement
ibility
Coaxial loop Coaxial bus (QJ71BR11, QJ72BR15)
Max. 2048 points and max. number of
X/Y I/O points of CPU module on master 8192 points
station
Maximum 16384 points
number of (Remote master station  remote I/O
B -
link points station: 8192 points, remote I/O station
per  remote master station: 8192 points)
network 16384 points
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points
(Remote master station  remote I/O
W • (MELSECNET II composite mode)
station: 8192 points, remote I/O station
4096 points
 remote master station: 8192 points)
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 bytes Remote master station  remote I/O
Maximum Master
• (MELSECNET II composite mode) station
number of station
link parameter first half: 1024 bytes {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
link points
Remote Remote I/O station  remote master
per
I/O 512 bytes station
station
station {(LX + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of
512 points 4096 points
I/O points per station
Communication
1.25 Mbps 10 Mbps
speed
Number of • Set the PLC to PLC network
stations 65 stations (Master station: 1, local 33 stations (Remote master station: 1, to a separate network.
connected in one station + remote I/O station: 64) remote I/O station: 32) • For stations over 33, build a
network separate network.
When using existing cables,
3C-2V the overall distance and
Applicable cable
5C-2V distance between stations
becomes shorter.
Either use an A6BR10/
3C-2V: 10km 3C-2V: 300m A6BR10-DC type repeater
Overall distance
5C-2V: 10km 5C-2V: 500m unit, or configure a separate
network.
When using the 3C-2V, use
Distance between 3C-2V: 500m 3C-2V: 300m
the A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
stations 5C-2V: 500m 5C-2V: 500m
repeater unit.
Maximum number of New MELSECNET/H
- 239
networks parameter (mandatory)
Communication Nothing to be noted though the
Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method
method communication method differs.
Transmission Nothing to be noted though the
Duplex loop Single bus
method transmission method differs.
Modulation method Nothing to be noted though the
(Modulation method) CMI method (Encoding method) Manchester code
(Encoding method) modulation method differs.
Transmission
HDLC standards (frame format)
format
Error control
CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over
system
The loopback function cannot
• Loop-back function due to error be used on a coaxial bus
detection or broken cable Diagnostic function for checking local system.
RAS function
• Diagnostic function for checking link lines To use the loopback function,
local link lines using an optical loop system is
recommended.
(Master station) When the master station is
(Master station)
Number of occupied CPU integrated type: 0 point replaced from a CPU
32 points per slot (I/O assignment: intelli.
I/O points Standalone:32 points per slot (I/O integrated type, one new slot
32 points)
assignment: special 32 points) (32 points) is required.

3-5
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(3) Comparison between MELSECNET/B module (twisted pair) and MELSECNET/H module
(optical loop/coaxial bus)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
MELSECNET/B module MELSECNET/H module Compat-
Item Precautions for replacement
Optical loop Coaxial bus ibility
Twisted pair
(QJ71LP21-25) (QJ71BR11)
Max. 2048 points and max. number of
X/Y I/O points of CPU module on master 8192 points
station
16384 points
Maximum (Remote master station  remote I/O
number of B - station: 8192 points,
link points remote I/O station  remote master
per station: 8192 points)
network 16384 points
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 points (Remote master station  remote I/O
W • (MELSECNET II composite mode) station: 8192 points,
4096 points remote I/O station  remote master
station: 8192 points)
• (MELSECNET mode) 1024 bytes Remote master station  remote I/O
Maximum Master
• (MELSECNET II composite mode) station
number of station
Link parameter first half: 1024 bytes {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
link points
Remote Remote I/O station  remote master
per
I/O 512 bytes station
station
station {(LX + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of
512 points 4096 points
I/O points per station
Communication 25Mbps/10Mbps -
125kbps/250kbps/500kbps/1Mbps
speed - 10Mbps
65 stations
(Remote master Set the PLC to PLC network to
-
station: 1, remote I/ a separate network.
Number of stations
32 stations (Master station: 1, O station: 64)
connected in one
local station + remote I/O station: 31) 33 stations
network
(Remote master Set the PLC to PLC network to
--
station: 1, remote I/ a separate network.
O station: 32)
SI optical cable
H-PCF optical
cable
A new optical cable has to be
Broad-band -
installed.
Applicable cable Shielded twisted pair cable H-PCF optical
cable
QSI optical cable
3C-2V A new coaxial cable has to be
-
5C-2V installed.
30km -
125kbps: 1200m
250kbps: 600m Either use an A6BR10/
Overall distance 3C-2V: 300m A6BR10-DC type repeater
500kbps: 400m -
1Mbps: 200m 5C-2V: 500m unit, or configure a separate
network.
When 1200m is required, use
Refer to Section GI optical cables for all optical
-
125kbps: 1200m 3.2.2. cables, and use QJ71LP21G
Distance between 250kbps: 600m as the module.
stations 500kbps: 400m Either use an A6BR10/
1Mbps: 200m 3C-2V: 300m A6BR10-DC type repeater
-
5C-2V: 500m unit, or configure a separate
network.
Maximum number of New MELSECNET/H
- 239
networks parameter (mandatory)

(to next page)

3-6
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
MELSECNET/B module MELSECNET/H module Compat-
Item Precautions for replacement
Optical loop Coaxial bus ibility
Twisted pair
(QJ71LP21-25) (QJ71BR11)
Communication Nothing to be noted though the
Half duplex bit serial method Token ring method
method communication method differs.
Transmission Duplex loop -
Single bus
method - Single bus
(Encoding method)
-
Modulation method NRZI coding
(Modulation method) NRZI method
(Encoding method) (Encoding method) Nothing to be noted though the
-
Manchester code modulation method differs.
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over
RAS function Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
(Master station) (Master station)
Number of occupied
Standalone: 32 points per slot (I/O 32 points per slot (I/O assignment: intelli.
I/O points
assignment: special 32 points) 32 points)

3-7
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.2.2 Cable performance comparisons

(1) Optical fiber cable

(a) Overall distance
The overall distance (30km) does not differ according to the optical fiber cable.
(b) Distance between stations
1) SI optical fiber cable
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

MELSECNET (II) MELSECNET/H module

Compat- Precautions for
Type module (Optical loop)
ibility replacement
(Optical loop) 10Mbps 25Mbps
SI optical fiber cable L type 1km 500m 200m
(type: A-2P-) H type 500m 300m 100m Refer to*1 below.
SI optical fiber cable (type: AN-2P-) 1km 500m 200m
H-PCF optical fiber cable 1km 1km 400m Refer to*2 below.
Broad-band H-PCF optical fiber cable - 1km 1km
QSI optical fiber cable - 1km 1km

*1 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, either change the type of optical
fiber cable, or install a gateway station midway along existing cables.
*2 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, use at a communication speed of
10 Mbps, change the type of optical fiber cable, or install a gateway station midway along existing cables.

2) GI optical fiber cable

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

MELSECNET (II) module MELSECNET/H module Compat-

Type Precautions for replacement
(Optical loop) (Optical loop) ibility

GI optical fiber cable 2km 2km

3-8
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Coaxial cable

(a) Overall distance
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

MELSECNET (II) module MELSECNET/H module Compat-

Type Precautions for replacement
(Coaxial loop) (Coaxial bus) ibility
3C-2V 10km 300m
Refer to*3 below.
5C-2V 10km 500m

*3 When the overall distance does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, either use an A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
repeater unit in the network, or configure a separate network.

(b) Distance between stations

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

MELSECNET (II) module MELSECNET/H module Compat-

Type Precautions for replacement
(Coaxial loop) (Coaxial bus) ibility
3C-2V 500m 300m
Refer to*4 below.
5C-2V 500m 500m

*4 When the distance between stations does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, either use an A6BR10/A6BR10-
DC type repeater unit in the network.

Remarks

The following shows the extension method when a repeater unit for the A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system is used. For details, refer to the Repeater Unit for the
MELSECNET/10 Coaxial Bus System type A6BR10/A6BR10-DC User’s Manual (IB-66499).
(1) The distance between stations of 500m (5C-2V) and 300m (3C-2V) can be extended.
500m (5C-2V)
Max.
300m (3C-2V)

CPU BR

R R

A6B
. . . QJ71BR11 CPU BR
BR R10

R R
R . . . Terminal
resistor
Max. 500m (5C-2V)
300m (3C-2V)

(2) Up to four repeater units can be used in a single network.*5

The overall distance can be extended to a maximum distance of 2.5 km.

CPU BR CPU BR CPU BR CPU BR

R R R R

A6B A6B
CPU BR CPU BR R10
R10

R R R R

A6B A6B
R10 R10

R R

CPU BR

Max. 2.5km

*5 It is necessary to add terminal resistor A6RCON-R75 (sold separately).

3-9
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.3 Functional Comparisons

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat- Precautions for
Item MELSECNET (II) module
MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
MELSECNET/B module
X/Y are used to perform 1:1
X/Y are used to perform 1:1
communications between the
communications between the
Cyclic transmission master station and local
remote master station and
stations, and the master station
remote I/O stations.
and remote I/O stations.
• The REMFR/REMTO
• The RFRP/RTOP instructions
instructions issued from the
issued from the master
remote master station are
station are used to read/write
used to read/write the buffer
the buffer memory of special Correct the RFRP/RTOP
memory of intelligent function
function modules at remote I/ instructions for reading/
modules at remote I/O
O stations. writing buffer memory on
stations.
• Other stations are accessed intelligent function modules
Transient transmission • Other stations are accessed
from GX Developer at remote I/O stations to the
from GX Developer
connected to the master REMFR/REMTO
connected to the remote
station. instructions. (Refer to
master station.
• The master station is Section 3.6.2.)
• The remote master station is
accessed from GX Developer
accessed from GX Developer
connected to remote I/O
connected to remote I/O
stations.
stations.
Automatic return When a disconnected remote I/O station returns to normal
function status, it is automatically restored and the data link is resumed.
In the case of an optical loop
In the case of an optical loop
system and coaxial loop
system, faulty parts are
system, faulty parts are
disconnected when a fault (e.g.
disconnected when a fault (e.g.
Loopback function cable disconnection) occurs,
cable disconnection) occurs,
and normal operation is
and normal operation is
continued on operable stations
continued on operable stations
as a result of the loopback.
as a result of the loopback.
Faulty parts are detected by the Faulty parts are detected by the
Change the devices in the
data of special relays (M9200 to data of link special relays (SB0
Error detection sequence program. (Refer
9255) and special registers to 1FF) and link special
to Section 3.6.1.)
(D9200 to 9255). registers (SW0 to 1FF).
Set the following test items by
• Set the forward loop/
the mode setting switch:
Set the following test items by reverse loop test in the
• Self-loopback test
the mode setting switch: network parameter
• Internal self-loopback test
Self-diagnosis test • Self-loopback test settings.
• Hardware test
function • Station-to-station test • Substitute the station-to-
Set the following test items in
• Forward loop/reverse loop station test with the
the network parameters:
test forward loop/reverse loop
• Forward loop/reverse loop
test.
test

3 - 10
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.4 Switch Settings Comparisons

(1) Comparison between MELSECNET (II) modules and MELSECNET/H modules

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description Compat- Precautions for

Switch name
MELSECNET (II) module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement

Station number setting

Sets the station number. Sets the station number.
switch

The forward loop/reverse

Sets the mode for operation Sets the mode for operation loop test is set in GX
Mode select switch
self-diagnostics test. self-diagnostics test. Developer network
parameter settings.

(2) Comparison between MELSECNET/B modules and MELSECNET/H modules

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description Compat- Precautions for

Switch name
MELSECNET (II) module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement

Station number setting

Sets the station number. Sets the station number.
switch

The forward loop/reverse

Sets the mode for operation Sets the mode for operation loop test is set in GX
Mode select switch
self-diagnostics test. self-diagnostics test. Developer network
parameter settings.

Communication speed
Sets the communication speed. - The setting is not required.
setting switch

3 - 11
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.5 Parameter Comparisons

3.5.1 Parameter comparisons

The network parameters of MELSECNET (II) are deleted when the programmable controller type is
changed with the GX Developer. After changing the programmable controller type, set the
MELSECNET/H network parameters again.

(1) MELSECNET (II)  MELSECNET/H

The following shows a comparison between MELSECNET (II) network parameter settings and
MELSECNET/H network parameter settings.
The MELSECNET (II) master station is compared with the MELSECNET/H master station.
MELSECNET (II) MELSECNET/H
Optical loop Optical loop

M 1MR

R1 R3 1R1 Network 1 1R3

R2 1R2

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Compat- Precautions for

MELSECNET (II) MELSECNET/H
ibility replacement
Network type Network type
Starting I/O No.*1 Starting I/O No.
Mandatory for the
- (No setting) Network No.
MELSECNET/H.
Total number of (slave) stations Total number of (slave) stations
LB, LW assignments on the
master station and remote
Network range assignments

Network range assignments

I/O stations
Master LB, LW assignments on the Master
Station inherent parameter *2
station master station and remote station
Supplemental settings-
I/O stations
Secured data send *3
Supplemental settings-
Secured data receive
LX/LY assignments on the LX/LY assignments on the
master station and remote master station and remote
I/O stations I/O stations
*1 Refresh parameters
Refresh parameters
Remote I/O Remote I/O
- (No setting) - (No setting)
station station

*1 This is set when the AnU/AnUS(H)/QnA/QnASCPU is mounted.

*2 Applied when LB/LW are set for both the first half/second half on MELSECNET (II). (For details, refer to Section 3.5.2
Parameter change example.)
*3 This is the data separation prevention function for reading/writing cyclic data of two words or more in a single operation.
(For details, refer to Section 3.7 Replacement Precautions.)

3 - 12
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.5.2 Parameter change example

The following shows an example of how to change the LB/LW, LX/LY network parameters when
replacing the MELSECNET remote system with MELSECNET/H.
The MELSECNET remote system can be used in the following operation modes.
• MELSECNET mode
• MELSECNET II composite mode

(1) MELSECNET mode

The following shows the procedure for changing the parameters in the case of a MELSECNET mode 2-
tier system configuration.
A MELSECNET composite system comprising local stations and remote I/O stations is divided into a
PLC to PLC network and a remote I/O network in the MELSECNET/H.
MELSECNET MELSECNET/H
Optical loop Optical loop

A3ACPU Q06HCPU
M
2R2
R1 R4
1NS2 Network 1MP1/2MR Network
1 2
2R1
L2 L3 1NS3

MELSECNET mode 2-tier system configuration example

Master station Remote I/O station Local station Local station Remote I/O station
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4
Input module

Input module

Special module

Output module
Output module
Output module

Output module

Input module

Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module

Input module
Input module
Input module
Input module

Input module

Special module
Special module
Output module

Output module

Output module
Output module

Output module

Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module

Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Input module
Output module

Output module
Output module

Output module

Output module

Output module

Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module

3 - 13
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(a) Setting ranges of MELSECNET link parameters

X0 200 28F 400 4BF 600 67F 700 77F
I/O area used by the host
R1 R4 L2 L3
station

Area for M/R Area for M/L

Y0 230 30F 480 59F 680 700 77F

I/O area used by the host
R1 R4 L2 L3
station

Area for M/R Area for M/L

B0 100 17F 200 27F

M L2 L3

Area for M/L

W0 100 17F 200 2BF 300 310 320 341 360 36F380 39F

M L2 L3 R1 R4 R1 R1

Area for M/R Area for M/R

Area for M/L Area for M/R

3 - 14
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(b) Setting ranges of MELSECNET/H link parameters

1) Setting ranges of network 1 link parameters
X0 200 600 67F 700 77F
I/O area used by the host
L2 L3
station

Area for M/L

Y0 230 680 700 77F

I/O area used by the host
L2 L3
station

Area for M/L

B0 100 17F 200 27F

M L2 L3

Area for M/L

W0 100 17F 200 2BF

M L2 L3

Area for M/L

2) Setting ranges of network 2 link parameters

The REMFR, REMTO instructions do not use B, W, and the setting of B, W is not required.
Only X,Y are set.
X0 200 28F 400 4BF
I/O area used by the host
R1 R2
station

Area for M/R

Y0 230 30F 480 59F

I/O area used by the host
R1 R2
station

Area for M/R

3 - 15
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

A MELSECNET/H module set as normal station requires network parameter setting. For replacement of
MELSECNET (II) module mounted on the CPU module of the AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding
AnUS(H)CPU), newly set network parameters.

The following shows parameters required on each station of MELSECNET/H.

Common parameter
Refresh parameter
(Network range assignment)

1Mp1
(Refer to example in (e) 2) and 3)) (Refer to example in (e) 4))

2MR
(Refer to example in (f) 1) and 2)) (Refer to example in (f) 3))

1Ns2
(Refer to example in (g) 2))

1Ns3
(Refer to example in (g) 2))

2R2

2R3

: Setting required/ : Setting required (Default setting is also acceptable)

3 - 16
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(c) MELSECNET master station

The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET master station (A3ACPU).
1) Network parameter setting (A3ACPU: MELSECNET master station)

2) Network range assignment (A3ACPU: MELSECNET master station)

3) Network range assignment (A3ACPU: MELSECNET master station)

3 - 17
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(d) MELSECNET local station, remote I/O station

As all stations perform cyclic communication according to the network range assignments of the
master station (A3ACPU), the network range assignment parameters of local stations and remote
I/O stations need not be set.
(e) MELSECNET/H control station (network 1)
The following shows the network parameter settings for when a station is replaced with a
MELSECNET/H control station (network 1).
1) Network parameter setting (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station, remote master station)

2) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

3) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

3 - 18
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

4) Refresh parameters (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H control station)

3 - 19
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(f) MELSECNET/H remote master station (network 2)

The following shows the network parameter settings for when a station is replaced with a
MELSECNET/H remote master station (network 2).
1) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H remote master station)

2) Network range assignment (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H remote master station)

3) Refresh parameters (Q06HCPU: MELSECNET/H remote master station)

3 - 20
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

An overall picture of CPU-side device assignments on the Q06HCPU to which the PLC to PLC
network (control station) and remote I/O network (remote master station) is mounted can be
checked at [Assignment image diagram] in the GX Developer network parameters. After setting
the parameters, make sure that assignments are correctly set.

3 - 21
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(g) MELSECNET/H normal station (network 1)

The following shows the network parameter settings for when a station is replaced with a
MELSECNET/H control station (network 1).
The same parameter settings are required on all normal stations.
1) Network parameter setting (1 Ns 2: MELSECNET/H normal station)

2) Refresh parameters (1 Ns 2: MELSECNET/H normal station)

3 - 22
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.6 Program Comparisons

3.6.1 Comparison of special relays M (SB) and special registers D (SW)

(1) Master station special relays

Special relays enabled when host station is the master station
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Special relay in the case of MELSECNET (II)
Corresponding MELSECNET/H special relay
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
Delete when used in a
LRDP instruction OFF : Not accepted sequence program.
M9200 None - -
received ON : Accepted (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
Delete when used in a
LRDP instruction OFF : Not completed sequence program.
M9201 None - -
complete ON : Completed (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
Delete when used in a
LWTP instruction OFF : Not accepted sequence program.
M9202 None - -
received ON : Accepted (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
Delete when used in a
LWTP instruction OFF : Not completed sequence program.
M9203 None - -
complete ON : Completed (Refer to Section 2.6.2
Transient instructions.)
OFF: Parameter
Link parameter OFF : Normal Receive parameter normal
M9206 SB0055
error in the host ON : Abnormal error ON: Parameter
abnormal
Delete when used in a
Link parameter OFF : Match sequence program as a
M9207 None - -
check results ON : Mismatch 3-tier system cannot be
configured.
Master station B,W OFF : Transmits to Delete when used in a
transmission range tier2 and tier3 sequence program as a
M9208 None - -
setting (only master ON : Transmits to 3-tier system cannot be
station of lower link) tier2 only configured.
Check instructions OFF : Executing the Delete when used in a
of link parameters check function sequence program as a
M9209 None - -
(only master station ON : Check non- 3-tier system cannot be
of lower link) execution configured.
Link card error (for OFF : Normal OFF : Normal
M9210 SB0020 Module status
master station) ON : Abnormal ON : Abnormal
OFF : Online
ON : Offline, station- OFF : Online
M9224 Link status to-station test, SB0043 Online switch ON : Other than
or self-loopback online
test
When ON, confirm the
loop status by SW0090.
OFF : Normal The loop status can
SB0090 Host loop status
ON : Abnormal also be judged by the
host station bits of
OFF : Normal SW0091 to SW0094.
M9225 Forward loop error
ON : Abnormal SB0092
(when host
Forward loop status
station is OFF : Normal
of the remote
remote ON : Abnormal
master station
master
station)

(to next page)

3 - 23
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special relay in the case of MELSECNET (II)
Corresponding MELSECNET/H special relay
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
When ON, confirm the
loop status by SW0090.
OFF : Normal The loop status can
SB0090 Host loop status
ON : Abnormal also be judged by the
host station bits of
OFF : Normal SW0095 to SW0098.
M9226 Reverse loop error
ON : Abnormal SB0096
(when host
Reverse loop
station is OFF : Normal
status of the remote
remote ON : Abnormal
master station
master
station)
OFF : Not being
executed
ON : Forward loop
Offline test OFF : Not instructed
M9227 Loop test status test/reverse SB00AC
instruction status ON : Instructed
loop test
execution
underway
OFF : All stations
RUN or STEP
OFF : RUN or STEP
RUN status
Local station RUN status Each station CPU
M9232 SB0084 ON : Stations in the
operation status ON : STOP or PAUSE RUN status
STOP or
status
PAUSE status
exist
Local station error OFF : No error Can be substituted by
M9233 None - -
detection status ON : Error detection SB0074.
OFF : No station
detected
Local station, parameter
remote I/O station OFF : No error Parameter status of errors
M9235 SB007C
parameter error ON : Error detection each station ON : A station
detection status detected
parameter
errors
OFF : Parameter
Local station,
OFF : No communication
remote I/O station
communication Parameter status of not in progress
M9236 initial SB0078
ON : Communication each station ON : Parameter
communications
in progress communication
status
in progress
OFF : All stations
normal
Local station, Cyclic transmission ON : Station where
OFF : Normal
M9237 remote I/O station SB0074 status of each cyclic
ON : Abnormal
error station transmission is
not executing
exist
OFF : All stations
normal
SB0091 Forward loop status
Local station, ON : Faulty station
remote I/O station OFF : Normal present
M9238
forward/reverse ON : Abnormal OFF : All stations
loop error Reverse loop normal
SB0095
status ON : Faulty station
present

3 - 24
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Master station special register

Special register enabled when host station is the master station
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special register in the case of MELSECNET (II)

MELSECNET/H special register
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
0: Normal completion
2: LRDP instruction
setting fault Delete when used in a
LRDP processing 3: Error at relevant sequence program.
D9200 None - -
results station (Refer to Section 2.6.2
4: Relevant station Transient instructions.)
LRDP execution
disabled
0: Normal completion
2: LWTP instruction
setting fault Delete when used in a
LWTP processing 3: Error at relevant sequence program.
D9201 None - -
results station (Refer to Section 2.6.2
4: Relevant station Transient instructions.)
LRDP execution
disabled
D9202 Stores whether or not
D9203 the slave station is a Delete when used in a
D9241 Local station link MELSECNET sequence program due
None - -
type compatible station or a to MELSECNET/H
D9242 MELSECNET II system.
compatible station.
0: Forward loop,
during data link
1: Reverse loop,
0: Normal
during data link
1: Stop instruction
2: Loopback
issued
implemented in Check whether or not
2: No common
forward/reverse SW0049 the data link is normally
parameters
directions (SW0090 Cause of data link SW0049.
D9204 Link status 3: Common
3: Loopback to transmission stop (Loop status is judged
parameter error
implemented in SW009A) comprehensively by
4: Host station
only forward SW0090 to SW009A.)
CPU error
direction
6: Communication
4: Loopback
canceled
implemented only
in reverse direction
5: Data link disabled
Stores the number
Station Station that
Loopback station of stations executing
D9205 implementing implemented forward SW0099
(forward loop side) the loopback on the
loopback loopback
forward loop side.
Stores the number
Station Station that
Loopback station of stations executing
D9206 implementing implemented reverse SW009A
(reverse loop side) the loopback on the
loopback loopback
reverse loop side.
D9207 Max. value SW006B Max. value
D9208 Link scan time Min. value SW006C Link scan time Min. value
D9209 Current value SW006D Current value
Accumulates and The retries on the
Number of retries
stores the number of forward loop side are
SW00C8 on the forward loop
retries on the stored as a cumulative
side
Stored as cumulative forward loop side. value.
D9210 Retry
value Accumulates and The retries on the
Number of retries
stores the number of reverse loop side are
SW00C9 on the reverse loop
retries on the stored as a cumulative
side
reverse loop side. value.

(to next page)

3 - 25
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Special register in the case of MELSECNET (II)
MELSECNET/H special register
master station
Compat- Precautions for
Number Name Description Number Name Description
ibility replacement
Accumulates and
Loop switching Stored as cumulative Loop switching stores the number of
D9211 SW00CE
count value count loop checks
conducted.
D9212 SW0084
Stores local stations in Stores the CPU
D9213 Local station SW0085 Each station CPU
a STOP or PAUSE RUN status of each
D9214 operation status SW0086 RUN status
status. station.
D9215 SW0087
D9216 Stores whether each
D9217 Local station error local station has Can be substituted by
None - -
D9218 detection status detected any error in SW0074 to SW0077.
D9219 other station.
D9220 Local station Turns ON when a local SW007C
D9221 parameter station or a remote I/O SW007D
Parameter error Stores the
D9222 mismatch station has detected SW007E status of each parameter status of
Remote I/O station an error on the link
station each station.
D9223 I/O assignment parameters from the SW007F
error master station.
D9224 Local station, SW0078
Stores stations that are Parameter Stores the
D9225 remote I/O station SW0079
performing communication communication
D9226 initial
communication of link SW007A status of each status of each
communication
D9227 parameters. SW007B station station parameters.
underway
D9228 SW0074
Local station, Cyclic transmission Stores the cyclic
D9229 Stores data link error SW0075
remote I/O station status of each transmission status
D9230 stations. SW0076
error station of each station.
D9231 SW0077
D9232 SW0091
Stores the forward The error on the loop
D9233 SW0092 Forward loop status
loop status of each line of the forward loop
D9234 Stores the station that SW0093 of each station
Local station and station. is stored.
D9235 detected the error on SW0094
remote I/O station
D9236 the forward loop line SW0095
loop error Reverse loop Stores the reverse The error on the loop
D9237 and reverse loop line. SW0096
status of each loop status of each line of the reverse loop
D9238 SW0097
station station. is stored.
D9239 SW0098
Number of receive The error count for
Stores cumulative total SW00B8 to Various error Various error
D9240 error detection each error cause is
of receive errors SW00C7 counters counters
times stored.

3 - 26
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.6.2 Transient instructions

(1) MELSECNET dedicated instruction

Dedicated instructions that were used on MELSECNET must be replaced with the following dedicated
instructions on MELSECNET/H.
The following table shows a comparison between dedicated instructions on MELSECNET and
dedicated instructions on MELSECNET/H. The table also shows reference items in the Q
Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O Network). Check
these reference items before changing the sequence program.
MELSECNET (II) MELSECNET/H NET/H
Reference
Instruction Instruction Description of
Category Description Category item in the
name name change
manual
Reading data
The master station Reads data from
from buffer
Reading data reads the data of buffer memory on
memory on Section
RFRP from remote special modules REMFR a target remote I/O
remote I/O station 7.1.1
I/O station mounted on remote station intelligent
intelligent function
I/O stations. function module.
modules
The master station Writing data to Writes data to
Writing data writes data to buffer memory on buffer memory on
Section
RTOP to remote I/O special modules REMTO remote I/O station a target remote I/O
7.1.1
station mounted on remote intelligent function station intelligent
I/O stations. modules function module.

The following describes operation by the instructions.

: Can be used, × : Cannot be used

Execution Target station

Instruction Name station Description Remote I/O
QCPU module
Reads data from buffer memory on a target remote I/O
station intelligent function module.
Reading from
Remote I/O Intelligent
buffer memory CPU Master module module function module

on remote I/O Channel 1 Buffer memory

REMFR REMFR Channel 2
station Channel 3
Channel 4 221
intelligent Word device Channel 5
function module 221 Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Writes data to buffer memory on a target remote I/O

station intelligent function module.
Writing to buffer Remote I/O Intelligent
memory on CPU Master module module function module

Buffer memory
remote I/O Channel 1
REMTO Channel 2
station Channel 3
REMTO Channel 4 754
intelligent Channel 5
function module Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

3 - 27
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3.7 Replacement Precautions

The following shows the replacement precautions when replacing MELSECNET (II) with
MELSECNET/H.

(1) Cables
For details on precautions for optical cables and coaxial cables, refer to Section 2.2.2 Cable
performance comparisons.

(2) System configuration

(a) System configuration using local stations and remote I/O stations in MELSECNET mode
and MELSECNET II mode
MELSECNET/H system, which is a composite system comprising local stations and remote stations,
provides high-performance functions by making a separation between local stations and remote
stations. It therefore cannot be configured by a mixture of local stations and remote stations. For this
reason, in a MELSECNET (II) system, when replacing a system, which comprises a mixture of local
stations and remote I/O stations connected to a single master station, with a MELSEC/H system, the
following system configuration is necessary. Normal stations are connected to a single control
station, and remote I/O stations are controlled by an additional remote master station (the control
station in a remote I/O system is defined as the "remote master station"). The following shows a
system configuration example.
System configuration using local and remote stations (optical)
MELSECNET (II) (optical) MELSECNET/H (optical) Remarks (proposed measure)
Optical loop Optical loop
• The control station of network No.1
M configures a PLC to PLC network that
Network Network controls normal station 1 and normal
1NS1 1 1MP4/2MR 2 2R3
station 2.
L1 R3
• The other network module becomes the
1NS2
remote master station, and the remote I/O
L2
network system of No.2 is configured.

3 - 28
3 REPLACEMENT OF MELSECNET (II) AND /B (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(3) Sequence program

(a) Data separation prevention
When two words (32 bits) or more of cyclic data (e.g. current value of the positioning module) are
handled, the old data sometimes is mixed with the new data. To read/write cyclic data of two words or
more in a single operation, set data separation prevention by the per-station block guarantee
function.
By enabling the per-station block guarantee function, handshaking is performed between CPU
modules and network modules to refresh the network and to enable data separation to be prevented
in station units. The per-station block guarantee function is enabled when "Secured data send" and
"Secured data receive" in the following parameters are set. Enabling the per-station block guarantee
function is recommended.

(b) I/O assignments

The I/O assignment function is used to reserve and set module information to prevent I/O numbers
from deviating even if a module is mounted later on in an empty slot, and to conserve the number of
I/O points.
With MELSECNET/H, each of the I/O assignments are set on each remote I/O station. With
MELSECNET (II), however, as the I/O assignments of all remote I/O stations were set on the master
station CPU. Set the I/O assignments of each remote I/O station again at transition to
MELSECNET/H.
Also, as the I/O assignment settings of PLC parameters are not cleared when the programmable
controller type is changed (e.g. when A3ACPU is changed to Q06HCPU), manually clear the I/O
assignment settings for the remote I/O stations.
(c) Processing time
The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series and the Q series.
For details on processing times, refer to the manual for the respective module.

3 - 29
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4
REPLACEMENT OF THE
4

MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC

NETWORK)

The Q series network modules support the MELSECNET/10 mode (functional and performance
compatibility mode) and MELSECNET/H extended mode (high functionality and high-speed mode).
This chapter describes the replacement using MELSECNET/10 mode that has the compatibility to the
existing network and is used the A, AnS, QnA, and QnAS series CPU modules in combination.
For details on the MELSECNET/H mode and MELSECNET/H extended mode, refer to the Q
Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network).
the MELSECNET/H mode and MELSECNET/H extended mode can be used when all stations are
replaced with the Q series modules.

4.1 List of MELSECNET/10 Alternative Models

(1) Replacement of the A/AnS series

Network type A/AnS series Q series
AJ71LP21
QJ71LP21-25
Optical loop A1SJ71LP21
AJ71LP21G QJ71LP21G
AJ71LR21
Coaxial loop
A1SJ71LR21
QJ71BR11
AJ71BR11
Coaxial bus
A1SJ71BR11

(2) Replacement of the QnA/QnAS series

Network type QnA series Q series
AJ71QLP21
QJ71LP21-25
A1SJ71QLP21
Optical loop AJ71QLP21S
QJ71LP21S-25
A1SJ71QLP21S
AJ71QLP21G QJ71LP21G
AJ71QLR21
Coaxial loop
A1SJ71QLR21
QJ71BR11
AJ71QBR11
Coaxial bus
A1SJ71QBR11

4-1
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4.2 Performance Specifications Comparisons

4.2.1 Module performance comparisons incompatible

(1) Performance comparison of AJ71LP21/A1SJ71LP21/AJ71QLP21/A1SJ71QLP21 and

QJ71LP21-25 (MELSECNET/10 mode)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ71LP21 AJ71QLP21 QJ71LP21-25 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71QLP21 MELSECNET/10 mode)
Maximum LX/LY 8192 points
number of link LB 8192 points
points per
LW 8192 points
network
Maximum number of link
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
points per station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number
Network No.240 to No.255
of PLC to PLC
Maximum number of 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks cannot be set.
networks and
networks and remote I/O networks) Alternate them with unused
remote I/O
network No.
networks)
Maximum number of
9
groups
Number of stations
64 stations (Control station: 1, normal station: 63)
connected in one network
SI optical cable, H-PCF optical cable, Broad-band H-PCF optical
Applicable cable
cable, and QSI optical cable
Overall distance 30km
Distance between SI optical cable: 500m, H-PCF optical cable: 1km, Broad-band H-
stations PCF optical cable: 1km, and QSI optical cable: 1km
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over
• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
• Prevention of system down by switching the control station
RAS function
• Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special
registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions
For comparison of dedicated
• N:N communication (e.g. monitor, program up/download)
Transient transmission link instruction, refer to
• Dedicated link instruction
Section 4.6.2.
32 points per slot (I/O
Number of occupied I/O 32 points per slot (I/O assignment:
assignment: intelli. 32
points special 32 points)
points)

4-2
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) Performance comparison of AJ71QLP21S/A1SJ71QLP21S and QJ71LP21S-25

(MELSECNET/10 mode)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Specifications
Item QJ71LP21-25 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ71LP21/A1SJ71LP21
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Maximum number X/Y 8192 points
of link points per B 8192 points
network W 8192 points
Maximum number of link points
{(Y + B)  8 + (2 × W)} 2000 bytes
per station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote I/O
Maximum number of networks
networks)
Maximum number of groups 9
Number of stations connected in
64 stations (Control station: 1, normal station: 63)
one network
SI optical cable, H-PCF optical cable, Broad-band H-PCF
Applicable cable
optical cable, and QSI optical cable
Overall distance 30km
SI optical cable: 500m, H-PCF optical cable: 1km, Broad-
Distance between stations
band H-PCF optical cable: 1km, and QSI optical cable: 1km
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over
• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
• Prevention of system down by switching the control station
RAS function
• Abnormal detection using link special relays and link
special registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions
• N:N communication (e.g. • N:N communication (e.g.
For comparison of dedicated
monitor, program up/ monitor, program up/
Transient transmission link instruction, refer to
download) download)
Section 4.6.2.
• Dedicated link instruction • Dedicated link instruction
Voltage 20.4VDC to 31.2VDC 20.4VDC to 31.2VDC
Current 0.2A 0.20A
External power
supply Cables of 1.25mm2 or more
Applicable
0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 1.25mm2 should be replaced with
cable size
cables of 0.3 to 1.25mm.
AJ71QLP21S: 32 points per
slot (I/O assignment: special
48 points 2 slots When the AJ71QLP21S is
32 points)
(I/O assignment: first half replaced, set the [Empty 16
A1SJ71QLP21S: 48 points 2
Number of occupied I/O points slots (I/O assignment: empty 16 points, points] of first half to the
second half intelli. 32 [Empty 0 point] with I/O
first half empty 16 points,
points) assignment.
second half special 32
points)

4-3
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(3) Performance comparison of AJ71LP21G/AJ71QLP21G and QJ71LP21G

(MELSECNET/10 mode)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Specifications
Item QJ71LP21G Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ71LP21G AJ71QLP21G
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Maximum LX/LY 8192 points
number of link LB 8192 points
points per
LW 8192 points
network
Maximum number of link
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
points per station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number
Network No.240 to No.250
of PLC to PLC
Maximum number of 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks cannot be set.
networks and
networks and remote I/O networks) Alternate them with unused
remote I/O
network No.
networks)
Maximum number of
9
groups
Number of stations
64 stations (Control station: 1, normal station: 63)
connected in one network
Applicable cable GI optical cable
Overall distance 30km
Distance between
GI optical cable: 2km
stations
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over
• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function • Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special
registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions
For comparison of dedicated
• N:N communication (e.g. monitor, program up/download)
Transient transmission link instruction, refer to
• Dedicated link instruction
Section 4.6.2.
32 points per slot (I/O
Number of occupied I/O 32 points per slot (I/O assignment:
assignment: intelli. 32
points special 32 points)
points)

4-4
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(4) Performance comparison of AJ71LR21/A1SJ71LR21/AJ71QLR21/A1SJ71QLR21 and

QJ71BR11 (MELSECNET/10 mode)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ71LR21 AJ71QLR21 QJ71BR11 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
A1SJ71LR21 A1SJ71QLR21 (MELSECNET/10 mode)
Maximum LX/LY 8192 points
number of link LB 8192 points
points per
LW 8192 points
network
Maximum number of link
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
points per station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Nothing to be noted though
Communication method Token ring method Token bus method the communication method
differs.
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method Manchester code
The loopback function and
multiplex transmission
function cannot be used on a
Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus
coaxial bus system. To use
the functions, using an optical
loop system is recommended.
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number
Network No.240 to No.250
of PLC to PLC
Maximum number of 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks cannot be set.
networks and
networks and remote I/O networks) Alternate them with unused
remote I/O
network No.
networks)
Maximum number of
9
groups
Normal stations up to 31
stations can be used on a
32 stations (Control
Number of stations 64 stations (Control station: 1, normal coaxial bus system. To use 32
station: 1, normal station:
connected in one network station: 63) normal stations or more, using
31)
an optical loop system is
recommended.
Applicable cable 3C-2V, 5C-2V, 5C-FB
Either use an A6BR10/
3C-2V: 19.2km 3C-2V: 300m A6BR10-DC type repeater
Overall distance
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 30km 5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m unit, or use an optical loop
system.
Distance between 3C-2V: 300m
stations 5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over

4-5
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Specifications
Item AJ71LR21 AJ71QLR21 QJ71BR11 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
A1SJ71LR21 A1SJ71QLR21 (MELSECNET/10 mode)
• Diagnostic function for
checking local link
• Loop-back function due to error
lines
detection or broken cable
• Prevention of system
• Diagnostic function for checking local
down by switching the The loopback function cannot be
link lines
control station used on a coaxial bus system. To
• Prevention of system down by
RAS function • Abnormal detection use the loopback function, using
switching the control station an optical loop system is
using link special
• Abnormal detection using link special recommended.
relays and link special
relays and link special registers
registers
• Network monitoring and various
• Network monitoring
diagnostic functions
and various diagnostic
functions
For comparison of dedicated
• N:N communication (e.g. monitor, program up/download)
Transient transmission link instruction, refer to
• Dedicated link instruction
Section 4.6.2.
32 points per slot (I/O
Number of occupied I/O 32 points per slot (I/O assignment:
assignment: intelli. 32
points special 32 points)
points)

4-6
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(5) Performance comparison of AJ71BR11/A1SJ71BR11/ AJ71QBR11/A1SJ71QBR11 and

QJ71BR11 (MELSECNET/10 mode)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ71BR11 AJ71QBR11 QJ72LP21G Compatibility Precautions for replacement
A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71QBR11 (MELSECNET/10 mode)
Maximum LX/LY 8192 points
number of link LB 8192 points
points per
LW 8192 points
network
Maximum number of link
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
points per station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token bus method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method Manchester code
Transmission method Single bus
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number
Network No.240 to No.250
of PLC to PLC
Maximum number of 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks cannot be set.
networks and
networks and remote I/O networks) Alternate them with unused
remote I/O
network No.
networks)
Maximum number of
9
groups
Number of stations
32 stations (Control station: 1, normal station: 31)
connected in one network
Applicable cable 3C-2V, 5C-2V, 5C-FB
3C-2V: 300m
Overall distance
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
Distance between 3C-2V: 300m
stations 5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
• Prevention of system down by switching the control station
RAS function • Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special
registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions
For comparison of dedicated
• N:N communication (e.g. monitor, program up/download)
Transient transmission link instruction, refer to
• Dedicated link instruction
Section 4.6.2.
32 points per slot (I/O
Number of occupied I/O 32 points per slot (I/O assignment:
assignment: intelli. 32
points special 32 points)
points)

4-7
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4.2.2 Cable performance comparisons

(1) Optical fiber cable

Overall distance and distance between stations do not differ depending on the optical fiber cable.
For overall distance and distance between stations, refer to Section 4.2.1.

(2) Coaxial cable

(a) Overall distance
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Specifications
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Compat- Precautions for
Type
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
Coaxial bus Coaxial loop (Coaxial bus)
3C-2V 300m 19.2km 300m Refer to*1 below
5C-2V 500m 30km 500m Refer to*1 below
*1 When the overall distance does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, either use an A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
repeater unit in the network, or configure a separate network.

(b) Distance between stations

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Specifications
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Compat- Precautions for
Type
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
Coaxial bus Coaxial loop (Coaxial bus)
3C-2V 300m 300m 300m
5C-2V 500m 500m 500m

4-8
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

Remarks

The following shows the extension method when a repeater unit for the A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system is used.
For details, refer to the Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET/10 Coaxial Bus System type A6BR10/
A6BR10-DC User's Manual (IB-66499).
(1) The distance between stations of 500m (5C-2V) and 300m (3C-2V) can be extended.

Max. 500m (5C-2V)

300m (3C-2V)

CPU BR

R R

A6B
BR R10 CPU BR
QJ71BR11

R R
R Terminal
resistor
Max. 500m (5C-2V)
300m (3C-2V)

(2) Up to four repeater units can be used in a single network.*2

The overall distance can be extended to a maximum distance of 2.5 km.

CPU BR CPU BR CPU BR CPU BR

R R R R

A6B A6B
CPU BR CPU BR R10
R10

R R R R

A6B A6B
R10 R10

R R

CPU BR

Max. 2.5km

*2 It is necessary to add terminal resistor A6RCON-R75 (sold separately).

4-9
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4.3 Functional Comparisons

(1) A/AnS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Item A/AnS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Communication
Performs communications with all stations using link
using B/W
relay and link register. (Communication using B/W)
(1:N communication)
Communication
Performs communications between I/O master station
Cyclic transfer function

using X/Y
and the other station in pairs. (Communication using X/Y)
(1:1 communication)
Constant link scan
Keeps link scan time constant.
function
Data link stop/restart Stops cyclic transmission temporarily with GX Developer,
function etc.
Disabled when mounted to the
Transfers link data to multiple networks using parameters
Inter-link data Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU.
all at once, when multiple networks are connected to one
transfer function Use QCPUs other than those
programmable controller.
above.
• LRDP instruction and LWTP
instruction cannot be used.
Transient transmission function

Change them to ZNRD

Communicates only when communication requests are instruction, ZNWR instruction,
Transient
issued between each stations. (Communication using READ instruction and WRITE
transmission function
dedicated link instruction and GX Developer, etc.) instruction.
• For comparison of dedicated
link instruction, refer to
Section 4.6.2.
Performs transient transmission to other stations of which
Routing function
network No. are different.
Performs transient transmission to all stations in the
Group function
group with an instruction.
Control station shift Enables to continue data link by switching normal station
function to sub-control station, even if control station is in failure.
Multiplex transmission Performs high-speed communication using duplex
function transmission channel (forward loop/reverse loop).
Returns the station disconnected from data link to the
Automatic return
system when it goes to normal status and restarts data
function
link.
Keeps normal operation between operable stations by
Loopback function disconnecting faulty area at error occurrence such as
RAS function

cable break.
Station detach Keeps normal operation between operable stations
function except faulty stations and stations switched off.
Set diagnostic items for station-
Checks line conditions of the network and setting to-station test and forward loop/
Diagnostic function
conditions of the module. reverse loop test in GX
Developer network parameters.
Data link status Detects faulty area with data of link special relay and link
detect function special register.
Treats the stations, which are to be connected in the
future, as reserved stations.
Reserved station function
By specifying the stations, which are not connected, as
reserved stations, communication error does not occur.

4 - 10
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) QnA/QnAS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Item QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Communication Performs communications with all stations using link
using B/W relay and link register. (Communication using B/W)
Communication Performs communications between I/O master station
using X/Y and the other station in pairs. (Communication using X/Y)
Cyclic transmission Stops cyclic transmission temporarily with GX Developer,
stop/restart etc.
Disabled when mounted to the
Cyclic transfer function

Transfers link data to multiple networks using parameters

Inter-link data Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU.
all at once, when multiple networks are connected to one
transfer function Use QCPUs other than those
programmable controller.
above.
Direct access to the Reads/writes directly from/to link device of the network
link devices module on the sequence program.
Increase of sending
Allows multiple modules, of which the network No. are Disabled when mounted to the
points by mounting
the same, to be mounted to one programmable controller Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU.
multiple modules of
and increases sending points per one station up to 8000 Use QCPUs other than those
the same network
bytes. above.
No.
Default of network Eliminates the refresh parameters setting by using
refresh parameter default values of refresh parameters.
Communicates only when communication requests are
Transient
issued between each stations. (Communication using
transmission function
dedicated link instruction and GX Developer, etc.)
Transient transmission function

Performs transient transmission to other stations of which

Routing function
network No. are different.
Performs transient transmission to all stations in the
Group function
group with an instruction.
Dedicated link Performs communications with other station at desired
instruction timing using dedicated link instruction.
Specification of Processes the requests that cannot specify network No.
default network of access path.
Clock setup for
stations on network Performs clock setup to CPU modules connected to the
with peripheral network with GX Developer.
device
Control station shift Enables to continue data link by switching normal station
function to sub-control station, even if control station is in failure.
Multiplex transmission Performs high-speed communication using duplex
function transmission channel (forward loop/reverse loop).
Treats the stations, which are to be connected in the
future, as reserved stations.
Reserved station function
By specifying the stations, which are not connected, as
reserved stations, communication error does not occur.
(To next page)

4 - 11
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Item QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Disabled when mounted to the
Switches link data refresh target to the standby network Q00J/Q00/Q01/Q12PRH/
Simple dual-structured
to continue data link when break causes error in regular Q25PRHCPU.
network
network. Use QCPUs other than those
above.
Change UFSET, UFRST and
Sends desired control data to all stations using user-flag UFOUT instructions to a
Using SB/SW as user flag
status (SW01F0 to SW01F3) without using link device. sequence program that uses
the link relay and link register.
Returns the station disconnected from data link to the
Automatic return
system when it goes to normal status and restarts data
function
link.
Keeps normal operation between operable stations by
Loopback function disconnecting faulty area at error occurrence such as
cable break.
Prevention of station
failure by using Prevents loopback due to shutdown of programmable
external power controller.
supply
Station detach Keeps normal operation between operable stations
function except faulty stations and stations switched off.
RAS function

Transient
transmission
available even if Checks the errors for CPU modules of which a stop error
programmable occurs, via network from the GX Developer, etc.
controller CPU is in
error
Checking the
transient Checks error completion time, abnormal detection
transmission network number and abnormal detection station number
abnormal detection of transient transmission.
time
Set diagnostic items for station-
Checks line conditions of the network and setting to-station test and forward loop/
Diagnostic function
conditions of the module. reverse loop test in GX
Developer network parameters.

4 - 12
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4.4 Switch Settings Comparisons

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
Q series Compat-
Switch name A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Precautions for replacement
MELSECNET/H module ibility
MELSECNET/10 module
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
• Set in GX Developer network
parameters.
Network No. • Network No.240 to No.255
Sets the network No. -
setting switch cannot be set.
• Alternate them with unused
network Nos.
Group No. Set in GX Developer network
Sets the group No. -
setting switch parameters.
Sets the mode.
<Setting range>
0: Online
2: Offline
• Set offline, loop test and
3: Loop test (forward loop)*1
station-to-station test in GX
4: Loop test (reverse loop)*1 Sets the mode.
Developer network
5: Station-to-station test <Setting range>
parameters.
Mode setting (master station) 0: Online
• Check network No., group
switch 6: Station-to-station test 1: Self-loopback test
No. and station No. in GX
(slave station) 2: Internal self-loopback test
Developer network
7: Self-loopback test 3: hardware test
diagnostics (host
8: Internal self-loopback test information).
9: H/W test
D: Network No. check
E: Group No. check
F: Station No. check
This switch cannot make
Condition setting parameter setting.
Sets the operation conditions. -
switch Set in GX Developer network
parameters.

*1 The QnA/QnAS series support the loop test.

4 - 13
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4.5 Parameter Comparisons

(1) Parameter of control station

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
Parameter Q series Compat-
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Precautions for replacement
name MELSECNET/H module ibility
MELSECNET/10 module
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Network type Network type
Starting I/O No. Starting I/O No.
Network No.240 to No.255 cannot be
set.
Network No. Network No.
Alternate them with unused network
Nos.
Total number of (slave) Total number of (slave)
stations stations
Set the group No. in GX Developer
- Group No.
network parameters.
Set the mode in GX Developer
- Mode
network parameters.
Monitoring Monitoring
time time
LB/LW setting LB/LW setting
LX/LY setting LX/LY setting
Network Network range I/O master Network range I/O master
parameter assignment station assignment station
(common specification (common specification
parameter) Reserved parameter) Reserved
station station
designation designation
Supplemental Supplemental
settings settings
Disabled when mounted to the Q00J/
Station inherent parameter Station inherent parameter Q00/Q01CPU.
Use QCPUs other than those above.
Refresh parameters Refresh parameters
Disabled when mounted to the Q00J/
Inter-link data transfer Inter-link data transfer Q00/Q01CPU.
Use QCPUs other than those above.
Routing parameters Routing parameters
Valid module during other Valid module during other
station access station access

4 - 14
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) Parameter of normal station

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
Parameter Q series Compat-
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Precautions for replacement
name MELSECNET/H module ibility
MELSECNET/10 module
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Network type Network type
Starting I/O No. Starting I/O No.
Network No.240 to No.255 cannot be
set.
Network No. Network No.
Alternate them with unused network
Nos.
Set the group No. in GX Developer
- Group No.
network parameters.
Set the mode in GX Developer
- Mode
Network network parameters.
parameter Disabled when mounted to the Q00J/
Station inherent parameter Station inherent parameter Q00/Q01CPU.
Use QCPUs other than those above.
Refresh parameters Refresh parameters
Disabled when mounted to the Q00J/
Inter-link data transfer Inter-link data transfer Q00/Q01CPU.
Use QCPUs other than those above.
Routing parameters Routing parameters
Valid module during other Valid module during other
station access station access

4 - 15
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(3) Parameter of standby station*1

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
Parameter Q series Compat-
QnA/QnAS series Precautions for replacement
name MELSECNET/H module ibility
MELSECNET/10 module
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Network type Network type
Starting I/O No. Starting I/O No.
Network No. Network No.
Set the group No. in GX Developer
- Group No.
network parameters.
Network Set the mode in GX Developer
- Mode
parameter network parameters.
Standby station compatible Standby station compatible
module module
Routing parameters Routing parameters
Valid module during other Valid module during other
station access station access

*1 Standby station is a station type of simple dual-structured system.

Only the following CPU modules support the simple dual-structured system.
• High Performance model QCPU
• Process CPU

4 - 16
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4.6 Program Comparisons

4.6.1 Comparison of link special relay (SB)/link special register (SW)

The table below shows only link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) to be used in interlock
program.
Device name and device No. of MELSECNET/H module are described in link device of internal
MELSECNET/H module.
Changing sequence program should be performed after checking the refreshed device of link device in
refresh parameters.

(1) AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding AnUS(H)CPU)

When MELSECNET/10 module is mounted to the CPU module of the AnN/AnA/AnSCPU (excluding
AnUS(H)CPU), link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) are assigned to special relay and
special register of CPU module.
For replacing with a MELSECNET/H module, change sequence program in reference to the following.
(a) Link special relay (SB)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

AnN/AnA/AnSCPU QCPU
Compat-
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module Precautions for replacement
ibility
Number Name Description Number Name Description
LRDP instruction cannot be used.
LRDP
OFF : Not completed When using it in sequence
M9204 instruction - - -
ON : Completed program, delete corresponding
complete
part.
LWTP instruction cannot be used.
LWTP
OFF : Not completed When using it in sequence
M9205 instruction - - -
ON : Completed program, delete corresponding
complete
part.
OFF : Normal OFF : Normal
M9211 Module status SB0020 Module status
ON : Abnormal ON : Abnormal
OFF : Online
ON : Offline, self- OFF : Online
Online host Online switch
M9240 loopback test, SB0043 ON : Other than
status (host station)
station-to- online
station test
When SB0090 turns on, check
Forward loop OFF : Normal OFF : Normal the loop condition with SW0090,
M9241 SB0090 Host loop status
status ON : Abnormal ON : Abnormal or check by host bit of SW0091 to
SW0094.
When SB0090 turns on, check
Reverse loop OFF : Normal OFF : Normal the loop condition with SW0090,
M9242 SB0090 Host loop status
status ON : Abnormal ON : Abnormal or check by host bit of SW0095 to
SW0098.
OFF : Loopback
When SB0090 turns on, check
Loopback inexecution OFF : Normal
M9243 SB0090 Host loop status the loop condition with SW0090,
status ON : Loopback ON : Abnormal
or check by SW0099 or SW009A.
execution
Data not When using it in sequence
OFF : Received
M9246 received - - - program, delete corresponding
ON : Not received
(Control station) part.
OFF : Receive
Parameter OFF : Received Parameter
M9250 SB0054 completed
unreceived ON : Not received receive status
ON : Unreceived
Communication OFF : Normal Host data link OFF : Normal
M9251 SB0049
status ON : Abnormal status ON : Abnormal

(To next page)

4 - 17
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

AnN/AnA/AnSCPU QCPU
Compat-
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module Precautions for replacement
ibility
Number Name Description Number Name Description
OFF : Not being
executed
ON : Forward loop Offline testing
OFF : No response
M9252 Loop test status test/reverse SB00AE response
ON : Response
loop test designation
execution
underway
OFF : RUN or STEP
SW0084 Each station Stores the CPU RUN
Control station RUN
M9253 to CPU RUN status of each station.
operation status ON : STOP or
SW0087 status (Including the host)
PAUSE
OFF : All stations are
OFF : All stations are
in the RUN or
in the RUN or
STEP RUN
STEP RUN
Each station status
Other station status
M9254 SB0084 CPU RUN ON : Station in the
operation status ON : Any station in
status STOP or
the STOP or
PAUSE status
PAUSE status
exist (including
exist
the host)
OFF : All stations are
OFF : All stations executing data
Cyclic
Other station normal linking
transmission
M9255 communication ON : Any error SB0074 ON : Stations that
status of each
status station are not
station
identified executing data
linking exist

(b) Link special register (SW)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

AnN/AnA/AnSCPU QCPU
Compat-
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module Precautions for replacement
ibility
Number Name Description Number Name Description
Host station Stores the station Stores the station
D9243 SW0042 Station No.
number number of the host. number of the host.
Stores the total
Stores the maximum
Maximum Total number of number of link
D9244 station No. set in SW0059
station No. link stations stations set in
network parameters.
network parameters.
Accumulates and
SW00B8 Accumulates and
Communication stores the The error count for each error
D9245 to Error counters stores the various
error count communication error cause is stored.
SW00C7 error time.
times.
D9248 Other station SW0084 Each station Stores the RUN
Stores the CPU RUN
to CPU RUN to CPU RUN status of each station.
status of other station.
D9251 status SW0087 status (Including the host)
Cyclic
D9252 SW0074 Stores the cyclic
Data link status Stores the data link transmission
to to transmission status of
of other station status of other station. status of each
D9255 SW0077 each station.
station

4 - 18
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(2) AnU/AnUS(H)/QnA/QnASCPU
The following device name and device No. are described in link device of internal MELSECNET/10 or
MELSECNET/H module.
Changing sequence program should be performed after checking the refreshed device of link device in
refresh parameters.
(a) Link special relay (SB)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Number
AnU/AnUS(H)/QnA/ Compat- Precautions for
Item QCPU
QnASCPU ibility replacement
MELSECNET/H module
MELSECNET/10 module
Module status SB0020 SB0020
Baton pass status (host) SB0047 SB0047
Data link status of each
SB0049 SB0049
station
Baton pass status of each
SB0070 SB0070
station
Cyclic transmission status of
SB0074 SB0074
each station

(b) Link special register (SW)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Number
AnU/AnUS(H)/QnA/ Compat- Precautions for
Item QCPU
QnASCPU ibility replacement
MELSECNET/H module
MELSECNET/10 module
Baton pass status of each
SW0070 to SW0073 SW0070 to SW0073
station
Cyclic transmission status of
SW0074 to SW0077 SW0074 to SW0077
each station

Remarks

For link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) that are not described in this section, refer to
each manual.

4 - 19
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4.6.2 Comparison of dedicated instructions

(1) A/AnSCPU
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
QCPU Compat- Precautions for
Instruction name A/AnSCPU
MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
MELSECNET/10 module
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Instruction format differs.
ZNRD instruction Reads the device data of other station. Change the sequence
program.
Instruction format differs.
ZNWR instruction Writes data to the device of other station. Change the sequence
program.
LRDP instruction cannot
Reads the device data of
be used. Change them to
LRDP instruction other station only by station -
ZNRD or READ
number designation.
instruction.
LWTP instruction cannot
Writes data to the device of
be used. Change them to
LWTP instruction other station only by station -
ZNWR or WRITE
number designation.
instruction.

(2) QnA/QnASCPU
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible

Description
QCPU Compat- Precautions for
Instruction name QnA/QnASCPU
MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
MELSECNET/10 module
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
SEND instruction Sends data to target station.
Reads data sent by SEND instruction to device of CPU
RECV instruction
module.
READ instruction, SREAD
Reads the device data of other station.
instruction
WRITE instruction, SWRITE
Writes data to the device of other station.
instruction
Issues "remote RUN" and "clock data read/write" requests
REQ instruction
to other stations.
ZNRD instruction Reads the device data of other station.
ZNWR instruction Writes data to the device of other station.
Change to a sequence
Turns user-flag which is
UFSET instruction - program that uses the link
corresponding to the host on.
relay and link register.
Change to a sequence
Turns user-flag which is
UFRST instruction - program that uses the link
corresponding to the host off.
relay and link register.
Turns user-flag which is Change to a sequence
UFOUT instruction corresponding to the host on/ - program that uses the link
off. relay and link register.

4 - 20
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

(3) Q series dedicated link instruction list

The table below shows the dedicated link instructions usable in Q series.
For instruction format of dedicated link instruction and precautions, refer to the following manual.
• Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
: Can be used by both the control and normal stations, × : Cannot be used

Execution
Target station
station
Instruction Name Description QnA/ AnU/
QCPU QCPU QnAS AnUS(H)
CPU CPU
SEND:Writes data to the target station (network module)
having the target network number.
RECV:Reads data sent with SEND to the CPU device.
SEND Data sending ×

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1 Logical channel 1 (channel 1)
Channel 2 Logical channel 2 (channel 2)
SEND Channel 3 Logical channel 3 (channel 3) RECV
Channel 4 Logical channel 4 (channel 4)
Channel 5 Logical channel 5 (channel 5)
Data Channel 6 Logical channel 6 (channel 6)
RECV Channel 7 Logical channel 7 (channel 7) ×
receiving Channel 8 Logical channel 8 (channel 8)

Reads the CPU device data (in 16-bit units) from the target
station having the target network number.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Other station Word device
READ READ Channel 2
word device Channel 3 ×
SREAD
read Channel 4 2594
Word device Channel 5
2594 Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Writes data (in 16-bit units) to the CPU device of the target
station having the target network number.
(SWRITE can turn on the device of the target station.)

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other station Channel 1 Word device
WRITE
word device Channel 2 ×
SWRITE Channel 3
write WRITE Channel 4 361
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Issues "remote RUN" and "clock data read/write" requests to

other stations.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Requesting
transient Channel 1
Channel 2
REQ transmission Channel 3 ×
to other REQ Channel 4 STOP
Channel 5
stations
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

(To next page)

4 - 21
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

: Can be used by both the control and normal stations, × : Cannot be used

Execution
Target station
station
Instruction Name Description QnA/ AnU/
QCPU QCPU QnAS AnUS(H)
CPU CPU
Receives the channel data sent with SEND by the interrupt
program and immediately reads it to the CPU device. The
processing is completed when the instruction is executed.

Receive CPU Network module Network module CPU

message Channel 1 Logical channel 1 (channel 1)
RECVS Channel 2 ×
(completed SEND Channel 3
Logical channel 2 (channel 2)
Logical channel 3 (channel 3)
in 1 scan) Channel 4 Logical channel 4 (channel 4)
Interrupt program
Channel 5 Logical channel 5 (channel 5)
Channel 6 Logical channel 6 (channel 6) I10 RECVS
Channel 7 Logical channel 7 (channel 7)
Channel 8 Logical channel 8 (channel 8)

[A-compatible instruction]
Reads the CPU device data from the target station having
the target network number.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other station *1
Channel1 Word device
ZNRD word device ZNRD * Fixed AnACPU
read AnNCPU
2594
Word device
2594

[A-compatible instruction]
Writes data to the CPU device of the target station having the
target network number.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other station *1
Word device
ZNWR word device Channel2 AnACPU
write * Fixed
AnNCPU
ZNWR 361

"Remote RUN" performed for other stations' CPU modules

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Channel 2
Remote Channel 3
RRUN × ×
RUN RRUN Channel 4 RUN
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

(To next page)

*1 CPU modules of the following version or later when the target station is the A2UCPU(S1), A3UCPU, A4UCPU, or
A2USCPU(S1)
• A2UCPU(S1), A3UCPU, A4UCPU: Version AY (manufactured in July 1995) or later
• A2USCPU(S1): Version CP (manufactured in July 1995) or later

4 - 22
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

: Can be used by both the control and normal stations, × : Cannot be used

Execution
Target station
station
Instruction Name Description QnA/ AnU/
QCPU QCPU QnAS AnUS(H)
CPU CPU
"Remote STOP" performed for other stations' CPU modules

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Channel 2
Remote Channel 3
RSTOP STOP
× ×
STOP RSTOP Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

"Read Clock Data" performed for other stations' CPU

modules

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Other station
Channel 2
RTMRD clock data Channel 3 × ×
read RTMRD Channel 4
Channel 5 Clock data
Word device Channel 6
Clock data Channel 7
Channel 8

"Write Clock Data" performed for other stations' CPU

modules

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Other station
Channel 2
RTMWR clock data Channel 3 × ×
written RTMWR Channel 4 Clock data
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

4 - 23
4 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

4.7 Other Precautions

(1) Processing time

The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series and the Q series.
For details on processing times, refer to the manual for the respective module.

(2) A/AnS series replacement precautions

Normal station of MELSECNET/H module requires network parameter setting.
For replacement with the QCPU and the MELSECNET/H module, newly set network parameters.

4 - 24
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5
REPLACEMENT OF THE
5

MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O

NETWORK)

5.1 Replacing MELSECNET/10 with MELSECNET/H

All stations of the existing A series are replaced with those of the Q series by changing MELSECNET/10
into MELSECNET/H.

5.1.1 List of MELSECNET/10 alternative models

(1) Replacement of the A/AnS series

Network type Station type A/AnS series Q series
AJ71LP21
QJ71LP21-25
Remote master station A1SJ71LP21
AJ71LP21G QJ71LP21G
Optical loop AJ72LP25
AJ72QLP25 QJ72LP25-25
Remote I/O station
A1SJ72QLP25
AJ72LP25G QJ72LP25G
AJ71LR21
Remote master station QJ71BR11
A1SJ71LR21
Coaxial loop AJ72LR25
Remote I/O station AJ72QLR25 QJ72BR15
A1SJ72QLR25
AJ71BR11
Remote master station QJ71BR11
A1SJ71BR11
Coaxial bus AJ72BR15
Remote I/O station AJ72QBR15 QJ72BR15
A1SJ72QBR15

5-1
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Replacement of the QnA/QnAS series

Network type Station type QnA/QnAS series Q series
AJ71QLP21
QJ71LP21-25
A1SJ71QLP21
Remote master station AJ71QLP21S
QJ71LP21S-25
A1SJ71QLP21S
Optical loop
AJ71QLP21G QJ71LP21G
AJ72QLP25
QJ72LP25-25
Remote I/O station A1SJ72QLP25
AJ72QLP25G QJ72LP25G
AJ71QLR21
Remote master station QJ71BR11
Coaxial loop A1SJ71QLR21
Remote I/O station AJ72QLR25 QJ72BR15
AJ71QBR11
Remote master station QJ71BR11
A1SJ71QBR11
Coaxial bus
AJ72QBR15
Remote I/O station QJ72BR15
A1SJ72QBR15

Remarks

System configuration in MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H (remote I/O network)

The following table lists CPU modules that can be installed on MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H
(remote I/O network). (The table shows in the case using a module for optical loop. The same applies
in the case using a module for a coaxial loop/coaxial bus.)

Master station Remote I/O station

CPU module Network module QJ72LP25-25 A(1S)J72LP25 A(1S)J72QLP25

QCPU
QJ71LP21-25 (MELSECNET/H ×
(excluding Basic model QCPU)
mode)
Master station on
QCPU the remote I/O
- -
(Basic model QCPU) network cannot be
used.
*1

QnA/QnASCPU A(1S)J71QLP21 (MELSECNET/10

mode)
*1

AnU/AnUS(H)CPU A(1S)J71LP21 (MELSECNET/10

mode)
Master station on
AnN/AnA/AnSCPU the remote I/O
- -
(excluding AnUS(H)CPU) network cannot be
used.
*1 The module with a serial number (first five digits) of "15012" or later can be used. For replacement using MELSECNET/10
mode, refer to Section 5.2.

5-2
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.1.2 Performance specifications comparisons

(1) Module performance comparisons

(a) Performance comparison of remote master station
1) Performance comparison of AJ71LP21/A1SJ71LP21/AJ71QLP21/A1SJ71QLP21 and
QJ71LP21-25
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ71LP21 AJ71QLP21 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
QJ71LP21-25
A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71QLP21

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
network LW 8192 points 16384 points*1
<Remote master station  *2
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
remote I/O station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)}
*2
Maximum number of link 1600 bytes <Remote I/O station  remote master station>
points per station <Remote I/O station  {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
remote master station> <Multiplexed remote master station  multiplexed
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} remote sub-master station>
1600 bytes {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
Communication speed 10Mbps 25Mbps/10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number of PLC to Network No.240 to No.250
Maximum number of 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and
PLC networks and remote I/ cannot be set. Alternate them
networks remote I/O networks)
O networks) with unused network No.
Number of stations connected
65 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote I/O station: 64)*3
in one network
SI optical cable, H-PCF optical cable, Broad-band H-PCF optical cable, and QSI
Applicable cable
optical cable
Overall distance 30km
<10Mbps>
SI optical cable: 500m,
H-PCF optical cable:
1km, Broad-band H-
PCF optical cable: 1km,
and QSI optical cable:
SI optical cable: 500m, H-PCF optical cable: 1km,
1km
Distance between stations Broad-band H-PCF optical cable: 1km, and QSI
<25Mbps>
optical cable: 1km
SI optical cable: 200m,
H-PCF optical cable: Use 10 Mbps when using SI
400m, Broad-band H- optical cable and HPCF optical
PCF optical cable: 1km, cable.
and QSI optical cable:
1km
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over

• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable

• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function
• Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions

• Monitor, program up/download with peripheral • 1:1 communication

device (Monitor, program up/ For comparison of dedicated
Transient transmission • Dedicated link instruction download) link instruction, refer to Section
• Available for Intelligent function module (only • Dedicated link 5.1.7.
AJ71QLP21/A1SJ71QLP21) instruction

5-3
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

Specifications
Item AJ71LP21 AJ71QLP21 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
QJ71LP21-25
A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71QLP21
32 points per slot (I/O
Number of occupied I/O
32 points per slot (I/O assignment: special 32 points) assignment: intelli. 32
points
points)
*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 64 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5-4
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

2) Performance comparison of AJ71QLP21S/A1SJ71QLP21S and QJ71LP21S-25

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
Compati-
Item AJ71QLP21S Precautions for replacement
QJ71LP21S-25 bility
A1SJ71QLP21S
LX/LY 8192 points
Maximum number of
LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
link points per network
LW 8192 points 16384 points*1
<Remote master station  remote
I/O station>*2
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600
<Remote master station  remote
bytes
I/O station>
<Remote I/O station  remote
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600
master station>*2
Maximum number of link points bytes
per station <Remote I/O station  remote {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600
master station> bytes
<Multiplexed remote master
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600
station  multiplexed remote
bytes
sub-master station>
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000
bytes
Communication speed 10Mbps 25Mbps/10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
Maximum number of networks 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote I/O networks)
Number of stations connected in
65 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote I/O station: 64)*3
one network
SI optical cable, H-PCF optical cable, Broad-band H-PCF optical
Applicable cable
cable, and QSI optical cable
Overall distance 30km
<10Mbps>
SI optical cable: 500m, H-PCF
optical cable: 1km, Broad-band H-
SI optical cable: 500m, H-PCF PCF optical cable: 1km, and QSI
optical cable: 1km, Broad-band H- optical cable: 1km
Distance between stations
PCF optical cable: 1km, and QSI <25Mbps>
optical cable: 1km SI optical cable: 200m, H-PCF
Use 10 Mbps when using SI optical
optical cable: 400m, Broad-band
cable and HPCF optical cable.
H-PCF optical cable: 1km, and
QSI optical cable: 1km
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over
• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function • Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special
registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions
• Monitor, program up/download
with peripheral device • 1:1 communication (Monitor,
For comparison of dedicated link
Transient transmission • Available for Intelligent function program up/download)
instruction, refer to Section 5.1.7.
module • Dedicated link instruction
• Dedicated link instruction
Voltage 20.4VDC to 31.2VDC
Current 0.2A
External power supply
Applicable Cables of 1.25mm2 or more should be
0.75 to 2mm2 0.3 to 1.25mm 2
cable size replaced with cables of 0.3 to 1.25mm.

5-5
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

Specifications
Compati-
Item AJ71QLP21S Precautions for replacement
QJ71LP21S-25 bility
A1SJ71QLP21S
AJ71QLP21S:
32 points per slot (I/O assignment:
48 points 2 slots
special 32 points) When the AJ71QLP21S is replaced,
A1SJ71QLP21S: (I/O assignment: first half set the [Empty 16 points] of first half to
Number of occupied I/O points
48 points 2 slots (I/O assignment: empty 16 points, second half the [Empty 0 point] with I/O
assignment.
first half empty 16 points, intelli. 32 points)

second half special 32 points)

*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 64 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5-6
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3) Performance comparison of AJ71LP21G/AJ71QLP21G and QJ71LP21G

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ71LP21G AJ71QLP21G QJ71LP21G

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
network LW 8192 points 16384 points*1
<Remote master station  *2
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
remote I/O station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)}
*2
Maximum number of link 1600 bytes <Remote I/O station  remote master station>
points per station <Remote I/O station  {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
remote master station> <Multiplexed remote master station  multiplexed
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} remote sub-master station>
1600 bytes {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number of PLC to Network No.240 to No.250
Maximum number of 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and
PLC networks and remote I/ cannot be set. Alternate them
networks remote I/O networks)
O networks) with unused network No.
Number of stations connected
65 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote I/O station: 64)*3
in one network
Applicable cable GI optical cable
Overall distance 30km
Distance between stations GI optical cable: 2km
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over

• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable

• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function
• Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions

• Monitor, program up/download with peripheral • 1:1 communication

device (Monitor, program up/ For comparison of dedicated
Transient transmission • Dedicated link instruction download) link instruction, refer to Section
• Available for Intelligent function module (only • Dedicated link 5.1.7.
AJ71QLP21G) instruction
32 points per slot (I/O
Number of occupied I/O
32 points per slot (I/O assignment: special 32 points) assignment: intelli. 32
points
points)

*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 32 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5-7
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

4) Performance comparison of AJ71LR21/A1SJ71LR21/AJ71QLR21/A1SJ71QLR21 and

QJ71BR11
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ71LR21 AJ71QLR21 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
QJ71BR11
A1SJ71LR21 A1SJ71QLR21

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
network LW 8192 points 16384 points*1
<Remote master
station  remote I/O *2
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 ×
*2
Maximum number of link LW)} 1600 bytes <Remote I/O station  remote master station>
points per station <Remote I/O station {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
 remote master <Multiplexed remote master station  multiplexed
station> remote sub-master station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
LW)} 1600 bytes
Communication speed 10Mbps
Nothing to be noted though the
Communication method Token ring method Token bus method
communication method differs.
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method Manchester code
The loopback function and
multiplex transmission function
cannot be used on a coaxial bus
Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus
system. To use the functions,
using an optical loop system is
recommended.
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number of Network No.240 to No.250 cannot
Maximum number of PLC to PLC networks 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and be set.
networks and remote I/O remote I/O networks) Alternate them with unused
networks) network No.
Normal stations up to 32 stations
33 stations (Remote master can be used on a coaxial bus
Number of stations connected 65 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote
station: 1, remote I/O station: system. To use 33 normal stations
in one network I/O station: 64)
32)*3 or more, using an optical loop
system is recommended.
Applicable cable 3C-2V, 5C-2V, 5C-FB
Either use an A6BR10/A6BR10-
3C-2V: 19.2km 3C-2V: 300m
Overall distance DC type repeater unit, or use an
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 30km 5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
optical loop system.
3C-2V: 300m
Distance between stations
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over
• Loop-back function due to error detection or • Diagnostic function for
broken cable checking local link lines
The loopback function cannot be
• Diagnostic function for checking local link • Abnormal detection using
used on a coaxial bus system. To
lines link special relays and link
RAS function use the loopback function, using
• Abnormal detection using link special relays special registers
an optical loop system is
and link special registers • Network monitoring and
recommended.
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic various diagnostic
functions functions
• Monitor, program up/download with
• 1:1 communication
peripheral device
(Monitor, program up/ For comparison of dedicated link
Transient transmission • Dedicated link instruction
download) instruction, refer to Section 5.1.7.
• Available for Intelligent function module
• Dedicated link instruction
(only AJ71QLR21/A1SJ71QLR21)
Number of occupied I/O 32 points per slot (I/O assignment: special 32 32 points per slot (I/O
points points) assignment: intelli. 32 points)

5-8
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 32 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5-9
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5) Performance comparison of AJ71BR11/A1SJ71BR11/AJ71QBR11/A1SJ71QBR11 and

QJ71BR11
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ71BR11 AJ71QBR11 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
QJ71BR11
A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71QBR11

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
network LW 8192 points 16384 points*1
<Remote master
station  remote I/O *2
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 ×
*2
Maximum number of link LW)} 1600 bytes <Remote I/O station  remote master station>
points per station <Remote I/O station {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
 remote master <Multiplexed remote master station  multiplexed
station> remote sub-master station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 2000 bytes
LW)} 1600 bytes
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token bus method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method Manchester code
Transmission method Single bus
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number of
Network No.240 to No.250 cannot
Maximum number of PLC to PLC networks 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and
be set. Alternate them with
networks and remote I/O remote I/O networks)
unused network No.
networks)
Number of stations connected
33 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote I/O station: 32)*3
in one network
Applicable cable 3C-2V, 5C-2V, 5C-FB
3C-2V: 300m
Overall distance
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
3C-2V: 300m
Distance between stations
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over
• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function • Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions
• Monitor, program up/download with
• 1:1 communication
peripheral device
(Monitor, program up/ For comparison of dedicated link
Transient transmission • Dedicated link instruction
download) instruction, refer to Section 5.1.7.
• Available for Intelligent function module
• Dedicated link instruction
(only AJ71QBR11/A1SJ71QBR11)
Number of occupied I/O 32 points per slot (I/O assignment: special 32 32 points per slot (I/O
points points) assignment: intelli. 32 points)

*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 32 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5 - 10
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(b) Performance comparison of remote I/O stations

1) Comparison between AJ72LP25/AJ72QLP25/A1SJ72QLP25 and QJ72LP25-25
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ72QLP25 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ72LP25 QJ72LP25-25
A1SJ72QLP25

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
network LW 8192 points 16384 points*1
<Remote master station 
remote I/O station>
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
*2
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)}
Maximum number of link 1600 bytes {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
points per station <Remote I/O station  *2
<Remote I/O station  remote master station>
remote master station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)}
1600 bytes
Maximum number of I/O
X+Y 2048 points X+Y 2048 points*4 X+Y 4096 points*3
points per remote I/O station
Communication speed 10Mbps 25Mbps/10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number of PLC to Network No.240 to No.250
Maximum number of 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and
PLC networks and remote I/ cannot be set. Alternate them
networks remote I/O networks)
O networks) with unused network No.
Number of stations connected
65 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote I/O station: 64)*5
in one network
SI optical cable, H-PCF optical cable, Broad-band H-PCF optical cable, and QSI
Applicable cable
optical cable
Overall distance 30km
<10Mbps>
SI optical cable: 500m,
H-PCF optical cable:
1km, Broad-band H-
PCF optical cable: 1km,
and QSI optical cable:
SI optical cable: 500m, H-PCF optical cable: 1km,
1km
Distance between stations Broad-band H-PCF optical cable: 1km, and QSI
<25Mbps>
optical cable: 1km
SI optical cable: 200m,
H-PCF optical cable: Use 10 Mbps when using SI
400m, Broad-band H- optical cable and HPCF optical
PCF optical cable: 1km, cable.
and QSI optical cable:
1km
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over

• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable

• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function
• Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions

• Monitor, program up/download with peripheral • 1:1 communication

device (Monitor, program up/ For comparison of dedicated
Transient transmission • Dedicated link instruction download) link instruction, refer to Section
• Available for Intelligent function module (only • Dedicated link 5.1.7.
AJ72QLP25/A1SJ72QLP25) instruction

5 - 11
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 When the X/Y numbers are duplicate, one side only is taken into consideration.
*4 For the A1SJ72QLP25, the maximum number of I/O points per remote I/O station is "X + Y 1024 points".
*5 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 64 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5 - 12
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

2) Performance comparison of AJ72LP25G/AJ72QLP25G and QJ72LP25G

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ72LP25 AJ72QLP25G QJ72LP25G

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
network LW 8192 points 16384 points*1
*2
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
Maximum number of link {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
points per station *2
<Remote I/O station  remote master station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of I/O
X+Y 2048 points X+Y 4096 points*3
points per remote I/O station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number of PLC to Network No.240 to No.250
Maximum number of 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and
PLC networks and remote I/ cannot be set. Alternate them
networks remote I/O networks)
O networks) with unused network No.
Number of stations connected
65 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote I/O station: 64)*4
in one network
Applicable cable GI optical cable
Overall distance 30km
Distance between stations GI optical cable: 2km
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over

• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable

• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function
• Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions

• Monitor, program up/download with peripheral • 1:1 communication

device (Monitor, program up/ For comparison of dedicated
Transient transmission • Dedicated link instruction download) link instruction, refer to Section
• Available for Intelligent function module (only • Dedicated link 5.1.7.
AJ72QLP25G) instruction

*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 When the X/Y numbers are duplicate, one side only is taken into consideration.
*4 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 64 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5 - 13
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

3) Performance comparison of AJ72LR25/AJ72QLR25/A1SJ72QLR25 and QJ72BR15

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ72QLR25 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ72LR25 QJ72BR15
A1SJ72QLR25

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
network LW 8192 points 16384 points*1
*2
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
Maximum number of link {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
points per station *2
<Remote I/O station  remote master station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of I/O
X+Y 2048 points X+Y 2048 points*4 X + Y 4096 points*3
points per remote I/O station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Nothing to be noted though the
Communication method Token ring method Token bus method
communication method differs.
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method Manchester code
The loopback function and
multiplex transmission function
cannot be used on a coaxial bus
Transmission method Duplex loop Single bus
system. To use the functions,
using an optical loop system is
recommended.
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number of
Network No.240 to No.250 cannot
Maximum number of PLC to PLC networks 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and
be set. Alternate them with
networks and remote I/O remote I/O networks)
unused network No.
networks)
Remote I/O stations up to 32
33 stations (Remote master stations can be used on a coaxial
Number of stations connected 65 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote
station: 1, remote I/O station: bus system. To use 33 remote I/O
in one network I/O station: 64)*5
32)*6 stations or more, using an optical
loop system is recommended.
Applicable cable 3C-2V, 5C-2V, 5C-FB
Either use an A6BR10/A6BR10-
3C-2V: 19.2km 3C-2V: 300m
Overall distance DC type repeater unit, or use an
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 30km 5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
optical loop system.
3C-2V: 300m
Distance between stations
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
Error control system CRC(X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over
• Loop-back function due to error detection or • Diagnostic function for
broken cable checking local link lines
The loopback function cannot be
• Diagnostic function for checking local link • Abnormal detection using
used on a coaxial bus system. To
lines link special relays and link
RAS function use the loopback function, using
• Abnormal detection using link special relays special registers
an optical loop system is
and link special registers • Network monitoring and
recommended.
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic various diagnostic
functions functions
• 1:1 communication
• Monitor, program up/download with
(Monitor, program up/ For comparison of dedicated link
Transient transmission peripheral device
download) instruction, refer to Section 5.1.7.
• Dedicated link instruction
• Dedicated link instruction

*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 When the X/Y numbers are duplicate, one side only is taken into consideration.
*4 For the A1SJ72QLP25, the maximum number of I/O points per remote I/O station is "X + Y 1024 points".
*5 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 64 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.
*6 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 32 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5 - 14
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

4) Performance comparison of AJ72BR15/AJ72QBR15/A1SJ72QBR15 and QJ72BR15

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ72QBR15 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ72BR15 QJ72BR15
A1SJ72QBR15

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points 16384 points*1
network LW 8192 points 16384 points*1

<Remote master station  remote I/O station>

*2

Maximum number of link {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes

points per station *2
<Remote I/O station  remote master station>
{(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of I/O
X+Y 2048 points X+Y 2048 points*4 X + Y 4096 points*3
points per remote I/O station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token bus method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method Manchester code
Transmission method Single bus
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255 (Total number of
Network No.240 to No.250 cannot
Maximum number of PLC to PLC networks 239 (Total number of PLC to PLC networks and
be set. Alternate them with
networks and remote I/O remote I/O networks)
unused network No.
networks)
Number of stations connected
33 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote I/O station: 32)*5
in one network
Applicable cable 3C-2V, 5C-2V, 5C-FB
3C-2V: 300m
Overall distance
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
3C-2V: 300m
Distance between stations
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
Error control system CRC (X16+X12+X5+1) and retry by a time over

• Loop-back function due to error detection or broken cable

• Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function
• Abnormal detection using link special relays and link special registers
• Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions

• Monitor, program up/download with

• 1:1 communication
peripheral device
(Monitor, program up/ For comparison of dedicated link
Transient transmission • Dedicated link instruction
download) instruction, refer to Section 5.1.7.
• Available for Intelligent function module
• Dedicated link instruction
(only AJ71QBR15/A1SJ72QBR15)

*1 Remote master station  remote sub-master station, remote I/O station: 8192 points
Remote sub-master station, remote I/O station  remote master station: 8192 points
*2 The remote master station includes the multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station.
*3 When the X/Y numbers are duplicate, one side only is taken into consideration.
*4 For the A1SJ72QBR15, the maximum number of I/O points per remote I/O station is "X + Y 1024 points".
*5 For the multiplexed remote I/O network, one station in 32 stations of the remote I/O station is used for the multiplexed
remote sub-master station.

5 - 15
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Cable performance comparisons

(a) Optical fiber cable
1) Overall distance
The overall distance (30km) does not differ according to the optical fiber cable.
2) Distance between stations
• SI optical fiber cable
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS Q series
Compat- Precautions for
Type series MELSECNET/H module
ibility replacement
MELSECNET/10 module (optical loop)
(optical loop) 10Mpbs 25Mbps
SI optical fiber cable 500m 500m 200m Refer to*1 below.
H-PCF optical fiber cable 1km 1km 400m Refer to*1 below.
Broad-band H-PCF optical
1km 1km
fiber cable
*1 When the distance between stations do not satisfy with specifications of MELSECNET/H, use at 10 Mbps of communication
speed, change the type of optical fiber cable or set the gateway station on the existing cable.
• GI optical fiber cable
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Compat- Precautions for
Type
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
(optical loop) (optical loop)
GI optical fiber cable 2km 2km

(3) Coaxial cable

(a) Overall distance
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Compat- Precautions for
Type
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
Coaxial bus Coaxial loop (Coaxial bus)
3C-2V 300m 19.2km 300m Refer to*1 below.
5C-2V 500m 30km 500m Refer to*1 below.
5C-FB 500m 30km 500m Refer to*1 below.
*1 When the overall distance does not satisfy the MELSECNET/H specifications, either use an A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
repeater unit in the network, or configure a separate network.

(b) Distance between stations

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Compat- Precautions for
Type
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module ibility replacement
Coaxial bus Coaxial loop (Coaxial bus)
3C-2V 300m 300m 300m
5C-2V 500m 500m 500m
5C-FB 500m 500m 500m

5 - 16
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

Remarks

The following shows the extension method when a repeater unit for the A6BR10/A6BR10-DC type
MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus system is used.
For details, refer to the Repeater Unit for the MELSECNET/10 Coaxial Bus System type A6BR10/
A6BR10-DC User's Manual (IB-66499).
(1) The distance between stations of 500m (5C-2V) and 300m (3C-2V) can be extended.
Max. 500m (5C-2V)
300m (3C-2V)

CPU BR

R R

A6B
BR R10 CPU BR
QJ71BR11

R R
R Terminal
resistor
Max. 500m (5C-2V)
300m (3C-2V)

(2) Up to four repeater units can be used in a single network.*2

The overall distance can be extended to a maximum distance of 2.5 km.

CPU BR CPU BR CPU BR CPU BR

R R R R

A6B A6B
CPU BR CPU BR R10
R10

R R R R

A6B A6B
R10 R10

R R

CPU BR

Max. 2.5km

*2 It is necessary to add terminal resistor A6RCON-R75 (sold separately).

5 - 17
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.1.3 Functional Comparisons

(1) A/AnS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Item A/AnS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module

Communicating with Performs communications with the I/O module of the

Cyclic transfer function

I/O module remote I/O station using X/Y (LX/LY).

Communicating with Performs communications with the special function

special function module of the remote I/O station using X/Y (LX/LY) and
module B/W (LB/LW).

Data link stop/restart Stops cyclic transmission temporarily with GX Developer,

function etc.

ZNFR instruction and ZNTO

Communicates only when communication requests are
Transient transmission function

instruction cannot be used.

N:N communication issued between each stations.
Change them to REMFR
function (Communication using dedicated link instruction and GX
instruction and REMTO
Developer, etc.)
instruction.

Performs transient transmission to other stations of which

Routing function
network No. are different.

Treats the stations, which are to be connected in the

future, as reserved stations.
Reserved station function
By specifying the stations, which are not connected, as
reserved stations, communication error does not occur.
Set the function with the PLC
I/O assignment function Sets the module configuration of the remote I/O station. parameter of the remote I/O
module.
Constant link scan
Keeps link scan time constant.
function
Multiplex Performs high-speed communication using duplex
transmission function transmission path (forward loop/reverse loop).
Extension functions

Return sequence
Sets the number of stations that can return to system
station number
during one link scan.
setting function
The number of transient
ZNFR/ZNTO transmissions differs depending
Sets the number of transient transmissions (a total of
instruction access on the total number of slave
entire one network) that can be executed during one link
number setting stations. The number of
scan.
function transient transmissions per
slave station is equal.
(To next page)

5 - 18
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Item A/AnS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Returns the station disconnected from data link to the
Automatic return
system when it goes to normal status and restarts data
function
link.
Keeps normal operation between operable stations by
Loopback function disconnecting faulty area at error occurrence such as
cable break.
Station detach Keeps normal operation between operable stations
function except faulty stations and stations switched off.
• Substitute the forward loop/
RAS function

reverse loop test for the

station-to-station test.
Checks line conditions of the network and setting • Set diagnostic items for
Diagnostic function
conditions of the module. station-to-station test and
forward loop/reverse loop test
in GX Developer network
parameters.
Blown fuse error and
input/output Set the function with the PLC
Sets the error check of the blown fuse error and the input/
verification error parameter of the remote I/O
output verification error.
check disabled module.
function

(2) Comparison with QnA/QnAS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Item QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Communicating with Performs communications with the I/O module of the
I/O module remote I/O station using X/Y (LX/LY).
Communicating with Performs communications with the special function
Cyclic transfer function

special function module of the remote I/O station using X/Y (LX/LY) and
module B/W (LB/LW).
Cyclic transmission Stops cyclic transmission temporarily with GX Developer,
stop/restart etc.
Direct access to the Reads/writes directly from/to link device of the network
link devices module on the sequence program.
Default of network Eliminates the refresh parameters setting by using
refresh parameter default values of refresh parameters.
(To next page)

5 - 19
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Item QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Communicates only when communication requests are
Transient issued between each stations.
transmission function (Communication using dedicated link instruction and GX
Developer, etc.)
Transient transmission function

Performs transient transmission to other stations of which

Routing function
network No. are different.
ZNFR instruction and ZNTO
instruction cannot be used.
Dedicated link Performs communications with other station at desired
Change them to REMFR
instruction timing using dedicated link instruction.
instruction and REMTO
instruction.
Specification of Processes the requests that cannot specify network No.
default network of access path.
Clock setup for
stations on network Performs clock setup to CPU modules connected to the
with peripheral network with GX Developer.
device
Multiplex transmission Performs high-speed communication using duplex
function transmission path (forward loop/reverse loop).
Treats the stations, which are to be connected in the
future, as reserved stations.
Reserved station function
By specifying the stations, which are not connected, as
reserved stations, communication error does not occur.
• The function is available only
when mounted on Q12PH/
Q25PH/Q12PRH/Q25PRH
CPU.
• The multiplexed remote
master station and the
Allows the remote sub-master station to automatically
multiplexed remote sub-
Multiplex master system control the remote I/O stations in the case of the
master station cannot be
multiplexed remote master station failure.
mounted on the same
programmable controller
CPU.
Mount on separate
programmable controller
CPU.
Cannot be configured on the
remote I/O network of
Parallel master system Sets two remote master stations in the same network.
MELSECNET/H.
Configure two networks.
Settings of remote I/O
station output status in the Set the function with the PLC
Retains the output status of the remote I/O station in the
case of system failure parameter of the remote I/O
case of the remote master station error.
with programmable module.
controller CPU error

5 - 20
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

Description
Compat-
Item QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Returns the station disconnected from data link to the
Automatic return
system when it goes to normal status and restarts data
function
link.
Keeps normal operation between operable stations by
Loopback function disconnecting faulty area at error occurrence such as
cable break.
Station detach Keeps normal operation between operable stations
function except faulty stations and stations switched off.
Transient
transmission
available even if Checks the errors for CPU modules of which a stop error
programmable occurs, via network from the GX Developer.
controller CPU is in
error
RAS function

Checking the
transient Checks error completion time, abnormal detection
transmission network number and abnormal detection station number
abnormal detection of transient transmission.
time
• Substitute the forward loop/
reverse loop test for the
station-to-station test.
Checks line conditions of the network and setting • Set diagnostic items for
Diagnostic function
conditions of the module. station-to-station test and
forward loop/reverse loop test
in GX Developer network
parameters.
Blown fuse error and
input/output Set the function with the PLC
Sets the error check of the blown fuse error and the input/
verification error parameter of the remote I/O
output verification error.
check disabled module.
function

5 - 21
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.1.4 Switch setting comparisons

(1) Switch settings comparisons of remote master station

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Switch name A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
• Set in GX Developer network
parameters.
Network No. • Network No.240 to No.255
Sets the network No. -
setting switch cannot be set.
Alternate them with unused
network Nos.
[Using QJ71LP21-25 and
QJ71LP21S-25]
Sets the mode.
Sets the mode. <Setting range>
<Setting range> 0: Online (10Mbps)
0: Online 1: Self-loopback test (10Mbps)
2: Offline 2: Internal self-loopback test
• Set offline and loop test in GX
3: Loop test (forward loop) (10Mbps)
Developer network parameters.
4: Loop test (reverse loop) 3: Hardware test (10Mbps)
• Substitute the forward loop/
5: Station-to-station test 4: Online (25Mbps)
reverse loop test for the station-
Mode setting (master station) 5: Self-loopback test (25Mbps)
to-station test.
switch 6: Station-to-station test 6: Internal self-loopback test
• Check network No., group No.
(slave station) (25Mbps)
and station No. in GX Developer
7: Self-loopback test 7: Hardware test (25Mbps)
network diagnostics (host
8: Internal self-loopback test [Using QJ71LP21G and
information).
9: H/W test QJ71BR11]
D: Network No. check Sets the mode.
E: Group No. check*1 <Setting range>
F: Station No. check 0: Online
1: Self-loopback test
2: Internal self-loopback test
3: Hardware test
Condition Set in GX Developer network
Sets the operation conditions. -
setting switch parameters.

*1 Group No. check is not used on the remote I/O network.

5 - 22
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Remote I/O station switch settings comparisons

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat-
Switch name A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
[Using QJ72LP25-25]
Sets the mode.
<Setting range>
0: Online (10Mbps)
1: Self-loopback test (10Mbps)
2: Internal self-loopback test
Sets the mode. (10Mbps)
<Setting range> 3: Hardware test (10Mbps)
0: Online 4: Online (25Mbps) • Set offline and loop test in GX
2: Offline 5: Self-loopback test (25Mbps) Developer network parameters.
3: Loop test (forward loop) 6: Internal self-loopback test • Substitute the forward loop/
4: Loop test (reverse loop) (25Mbps) reverse loop test for the station-
Mode setting 5: Station-to-station test 7: Hardware test (25Mbps) to-station test.
switch (master station) 8: Online (MELSECNET/10 • Check network No., group No.
6: Station-to-station test
mode)*1 and station No. in GX Developer
(slave station)
[Using QJ72LP25G and network diagnostics (host
7: Self-loopback test
QJ72BR15] information).
8: Internal self-loopback test
Sets the mode.
9: H/W test
<Setting range>
F: Station No. check
0: Online
1: Self-loopback test
2: Internal self-loopback test
3: Hardware test
8: Online (MELSECNET/10
mode)*1
Condition Nothing to be noted for the
Sets the operation conditions. -
setting switch MELSECNET/H.

*1 Modules with a serial number (first five digits) of "15012" or later supports Online (MELSECNET/10 mode).

5 - 23
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.1.5 Parameter comparisons

(1) Parameter of remote master station

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Parameter Compat-
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
name ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Network type Network type
Starting I/O No. Starting I/O No.
Network No. Network No.
Total number of (slave) stations Total number of (slave) stations
Set the mode in GX Developer
- Mode
network parameters.
Monitoring time Monitoring time
BW setting BW setting
XY setting XY setting
Network Network range Reserved Network range Reserved
parameter assignment station assignment station
(common designation (common designation
parameter) I/O assignment parameter) Set with the PLC parameter of
-
setting each remote I/O station.
Supplemental Supplemental
settings settings
Refresh parameters Refresh parameters
Routing parameters Routing parameters
Valid module during other Valid module during other
station access station access

5 - 24
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Parameter of multiplexed remote master station*1

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Parameter Compat-
QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
name ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Network type Network type
Starting I/O No. Starting I/O No.
Network No. Network No.
Total number of (slave) stations Total number of (slave) stations
The group No. is not used in the
- Group No. remote I/O network.
Set to [0].
Set the mode in GX Developer
- Mode
network parameters.
Monitoring time Monitoring time
BW setting BW setting
Network XY setting XY setting
parameter Reserved Reserved
station station
Network range Network range
designation designation
assignment assignment
Remote sub- Remote sub-
(common (common
master station master station
parameter) parameter)
specification specification
I/O assignment Set with the PLC parameter of
-
setting each remote I/O station.
Supplemental Supplemental
settings settings
Refresh parameters Refresh parameters
Routing parameters Routing parameters

*1 The multiplexed remote master station is the station type of the multiplex master system.
Only the following CPU modules support the multiplex master system.
• Process CPU
• Redundant CPU

5 - 25
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(3) Parameter of multiplexed remote sub-master station*1

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Parameter Compat-
QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
name ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Network type Network type
Starting I/O No. Starting I/O No.
Network No. Network No.
New parameter of MELSECNET/H
(To enable the multiplexed remote
- Total number of (slave) stations sub-master station to control the
remote I/O station, the setting is
required.)
The group No. is not used in the
- Group No. remote I/O network.
Set to [0].
Set the mode in GX Developer
- Mode
network parameters.
Network Monitoring time
parameter BW setting
XY setting
Reserved New parameter of MELSECNET/H
Network range
station (To enable the multiplexed remote
assignment
- designation sub-master station to control the
(common
Remote sub- remote I/O station, the setting is
parameter)
master station required.)
specification
Supplemental
settings
Refresh parameters Refresh parameters
Routing parameters Routing parameters
Valid module during other Valid module during other
station access station access

*1 The multiplexed remote sub-master station is the station type of the multiplex master system.
Only the following CPU modules support the multiplex master system.
• Process CPU
• Redundant CPU

5 - 26
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(4) Parameter of parallel remote master station

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Parameter Compat-
QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
name ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Network type
Starting I/O No.
Network No.
Total number of (slave) stations
Monitoring time
BW setting
XY setting
Sub-BW setting
Sub-XY setting
Remote sub-
Network range Cannot be configured on the
master station
Network assignment remote I/O network of
specification -
parameter (common MELSECNET/H.
Reserved
parameter) Configure two networks.
station
designation
I/O assignment
setting
Supplemental
settings
Refresh parameters
Routing parameters
Valid module during other
station access

5 - 27
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(5) Parameter of parallel remote sub-master station

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Parameter Compat-
QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
name ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Network type
Starting I/O No.
Cannot be configured on the
Network No.
Network remote I/O network of
Refresh parameters -
parameter MELSECNET/H.
Routing parameters
Configure two networks.
Valid module during other
station access

(6) Parameter of remote I/O station

When mounting the intelligent function module on the remote I/O station, set the parameter.
When mounting only I/O modules, the operation is available even if the parameter is not set. (It is
operated with default value.)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Parameter Compat-
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series Precautions for replacement
name ibility
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
New parameter of MELSECNET/H
- PLC system setting (The number of empty slots, etc. is
set.)
New parameter of MELSECNET/H
- PLC RAS setting (The operation mode and error
PLC check at an error are set.)
parameters New parameter of MELSECNET/H
- Operation setting (The parameters for transmitting
between devices are set.)
New parameter of MELSECNET/H
- I/O assignment setting (The I/O assignment of remote I/O
station, etc. is set.)
New parameter of MELSECNET/H
(The network parameter of
Ethernet
Ethernet module mounted on the
Network remote I/O station is set.)
-
parameter New parameter of MELSECNET/H
(The network parameter of CC-
CC-Link
Link module mounted on the
remote I/O station is set.)
New parameter of MELSECNET/H
(The remote password of Ethernet
Remote
- Remote password setting module and serial communication
password
module, etc. mounted on the
remote I/O station is set.)

5 - 28
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.1.6 Program comparisons

(1) Comparison of link special relay (SB)/link special register (SW)

The table below shows only link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) to be used in interlock
program.
The following device name and device No. are described in link device of internal MELSECNET/10 or
MELSECNET/H module.
Changing sequence program should be performed after checking the refreshed device of link device in
refresh parameters.
(a) Link special relay (SB)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Number
Compat- Precautions for
Item A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series
ibility replacement
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Module status SB0020 SB0020
Baton pass status (host) SB0047 SB0047
Data link status of each
SB0049 SB0049
station
Baton pass status of
SB0070 SB0070
each station
Cyclic transmission
SB0074 SB0074
status of each station

(b) Link special register (SW)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Number
Compat- Precautions for
Item A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series
ibility replacement
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Baton pass status of
SW0070 to SW0073 SW0070 to SW0073
each station
Cyclic transmission
SW0074 to SW0077 SW0074 to SW0077
status of each station

Remarks

For link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) that are not described in this section, refer to
each manual.

5 - 29
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.1.7 Comparison of dedicated instruction

(1) A/AnS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat- Precautions for
Instruction name A/AnS series Q series
ibility replacement
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Reads data from the buffer Reads data from the buffer ZNFR instruction cannot
memory of special function memory of the intelligent be used.
ZNFR instruction
module in the target remote I/O function module in the target Change it to REMFR
station. remote I/O station. instruction.
Writes data to the buffer Writes data to the buffer ZNTO instruction cannot
memory of special function memory of the intelligent be used.
ZNTO instruction
module in the target remote I/O function module in the target Change it to REMFR
station. remote I/O station. instruction.

(2) QnA/QnAS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Description
Compat- Precautions for
Instruction name QnA/QnAS series Q series
ibility replacement
MELSECNET/10 module MELSECNET/H module
Reads data from the buffer Reads data from the buffer ZNFR instruction cannot
memory of special function memory of the intelligent be used.
ZNFR instruction
module in the target remote I/O function module in the target Change it to REMFR
station. remote I/O station. instruction.
Writes data to the buffer Writes data to the buffer ZNTO instruction cannot
memory of special function memory of the intelligent be used.
ZNTO instruction
module in the target remote I/O function module in the target Change it to REMFR
station. remote I/O station. instruction.
SEND instruction Sends data to target station.
RECV instruction Reads data sent by SEND instruction to device of CPU module.
READ instruction,
Reads the device data of other station.
SREAD instruction
WRITE instruction,
Writes data to the device of other station.
SWRITE instruction
Issues "remote RUN/STOP" and "clock data read/write"
REQ instruction
requests to other stations.
ZNRD instruction Reads the device data of other station.
ZNWR instruction Writes data to the device of other station.

5 - 30
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(3) Q series dedicated link instruction list

The table below shows the dedicated link instructions usable in Q series.
For instruction format of dedicated link instruction and precautions, refer to the following manual.
• Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(Remote I/O network)
• Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual
(PLC to PLC network)
(a) For remote I/O station
: Can be used, × : Cannot be used

Execution
Target station
Instruction Name station Description
QCPU Remote I/O module
Reads data from the remote I/O station intelligent function
module buffer memory.

Remote I/O Intelligent

CPU Master module module function module
Read remote I/O
Channel 1 Buffer memory
station intelligent Channel 2
REMFR REMFR
function module Channel 3
Channel 4 221
buffer memory
Word device Channel 5
221 Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Writes data to object remote I/O station intelligent function

module buffer memory. (Not processed at the execution from
multiplexed remote sub-master station.)

Remote I/O Intelligent

Write remote I/O CPU Master module module function module

station intelligent Channel 1 Buffer memory

REMTO
function module Channel 2
Channel 3
buffer memory REMTO Channel 4 754
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Reads remote I/O station device data for object network

number. (in 16-bit units)

Remote I/O
CPU Master module module
Read other Channel 1 Word device
READ station word READ Channel 2
Channel 3
device
Channel 4 2594
Word device Channel 5
2594 Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Writes device to object network number remote I/O station.

(in 16-bit units)

Remote I/O
CPU Master module module
Write other
Channel 1 Word device
WRITE station word Channel 2
Channel 3
device WRITE Channel 4 361
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

5 - 31
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(b) For multiplexed remote master station and multiplexed remote sub-master station
: Can be used, × : Cannot be used
Execution
Target station
station
Multiplexed Multiplexed
Instruction Name Description
QnPH QnPRH remote remote
CPU CPU master sub-master
station station

SEND:Writes data to the target station (network module) of the target

network No.
RECV:Reads the data sent by SEND to the CPU device.
SEND Data sending ×

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1 Logical channel 1 (Channel 1)

Channel 2 Logical channel 2 (Channel 2)
SEND Channel 3 Logical channel 3 (Channel 3) RECV
Channel 4 Logical channel 4 (Channel 4)
Channel 5 Logical channel 5 (Channel 5)
Channel 6 Logical channel 6 (Channel 6)
RECV Data receiving × Channel 7 Logical channel 7 (Channel 7)
Channel 8 Logical channel 8 (Channel 8)

Reads the CPU device data of the target station of the target network
No. (in 16-bit units).

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1 Word device

Other station
READ READ Channel 2
word device Channel 3
SREAD
read Channel 4 2594
Word device Channel 5
2594 Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Writes data to the CPU device of the target station of the target
network No. (in 16-bit units).
(SWRITE can turn ON the device of the target station.)

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other station Channel 1 Word device

WRITE
word device Channel 2
SWRITE Channel 3
write
WRITE Channel 4 361
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Issues "remote RUN" and "clock data read/write" requests to other

stations.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Requesting Channel 1
transient Channel 2
REQ Channel 3
transmission to
other stations
REQ Channel 4 STOP
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

(To next page)

5 - 32
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

: Can be used, × : Cannot be used

Execution
Target station
station
Multiplexed Multiplexed
Instruction Name Description
QnPH QnPRH remote remote
CPU CPU master sub-master
station station
Receives the channel data, which was sent by SEND, within an
interrupt program and reads that data to the CPU device
immediately. Processing is completed when the instruction is
executed.

Receive CPU Network module Network module CPU

message
RECVS × Channel 1 Logical channel 1 (Channel 1)
(completed in Channel 2 Logical channel 2 (Channel 2)
1 scan) SEND Channel 3 Logical channel 3 (Channel 3)
Channel 4 Logical channel 4 (Channel 4)
Interrupt program
Channel 5 Logical channel 5 (Channel 5)
Channel 6 Logical channel 6 (Channel 6) I10 RECVS
Channel 7 Logical channel 7 (Channel 7)
Channel 8 Logical channel 8 (Channel 8)

[A-compatible instruction]
Reads the CPU device data of the target station of the target network
No.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other station Channel 1 Word device

ZNRD word device ZNRD * Fixed
read
2594
Word device
2594

[A-compatible instruction]
Writes data to the CPU device of the target station of the target
network No.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Other station Word device
ZNWR word device Channel 2
write * Fixed
ZNWR 361

Performs "remote RUN" to the CPU module of the other station.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Channel 2
RRUN Remote RUN Channel 3
RRUN Channel 4 RUN
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

(To next page)

5 - 33
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

: Can be used, × : Cannot be used

Execution
Target station
station
Multiplexed Multiplexed
Instruction Name Description
QnPH QnPRH remote remote
CPU CPU master sub-master
station station
Performs "remote STOP" to the CPU module of the other station.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Channel 2
RSTOP Remote STOP Channel 3
RSTOP Channel 4 STOP
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

Performs "clock data read" to the CPU module of the other station.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Channel 2
Other station Channel 3
RTMRD
clock data read RTMRD Channel 4
Channel 5 Clock data
Word device Channel 6
Clock data Channel 7
Channel 8

"Write clock data" to the CPU module of other station.

CPU Network module Network module CPU

Channel 1
Other station Channel 2
RTMWR clock data Channel 3
RTMWR Channel 4 Clock data
written
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8

5 - 34
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.1.8 Other precautions

(1) Remote I/O network replacement precautions

Replace all remote I/O stations with Q series MELSECNET/H modules when the CPU module on the
remote master station is replaced with a Q series CPU module
On the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network, the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series MELSECNET/10 module and
the Q series MELSECNET/H module cannot be used in combination.
For the method of replacing some remote I/O stations with a Q series module without changing the
remote master station using the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series, refer to Section 5.2.

(2) Processing time

The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series and the Q series.
For details on processing time, refer to the manual for the respective module.

(3) Interface of remote I/O station

The interface to connect programming tools such as GX Developer differs between the A/AnS/QnA/
QnAS series and the Q series.
• A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series:RS-422 interface
• Q series:RS-232 interface

When connecting to the Q series, use the following RS-232 cable.

• RS-232 cable: QC30R2

(4) Precautions for replacement of QnA/QnAS series

(a) Parallel master system
The parallel master system cannot be configured in the MELSECNET/H.
Configure two networks.
System configuration
MELSECNET/10 MELSECNET/H
precautions
1) Divide into two networks of
1PMR 1PSMR1 1R2 2R4
which the network No.
Network No.1 1MR/2MR Network No.2 differs.
1R2 1R5
2R5
2) Set the station that is not
1R3
1R3 1R4 used after dividing the
MR Remote master station network as the reserved
PMR Parallel remote master station
R
station.
Remote I/O station
PSMR Parallel remote sub-master station 3) Use the inter-link data
Network No.
R Remote I/O station Station No. transfer function for data
Network No. communication between
Station No. the remote master stations.

(b) Multiplex master system

1) MELSECNET/H can establish the system only when mounting on the following CPU.
• Process CPU (Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU)
• Redundant CPU (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU)
2) For the MELSECNET/H, the multiplexed remote master station and the multiplexed remote sub-
master station cannot be mounted on the same CPU.
Mount the multiplexed remote master station and the multiplexed remote sub-master station on
separate CPUs.

5 - 35
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.2 Gradually replacing A series remote I/O stations with Q series remote
I/O stations

Use the existing A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series master stations without any change, and gradually replace
the existing remote I/O stations with Q series stations by each station.
For network, MELSECNET/10 can be continuously used by utilizing Q series MELSECNET/H modules
in MELSECNET/10 mode, and thus Q series remote I/O stations can be used together with remaining A/
AnS/QnA/QnAS remote I/O stations.

5.2.1 List of MELSECNET/10 modules and the alternative modules

(1) Replacement of the A/AnS series

Network type Station type A/AnS series Q series (alternative module)
AJ71LP21
Remote master
A1SJ71LP21 Replacement not required
station
AJ71LP21G
AJ72LP25
Optical loop QJ72LP25-25 (MELSECNET/10
AJ72QLP25
mode)*1
Remote I/O station A1SJ72QLP25
QJ72LP25G (MELSECNET/10
AJ72LP25G
mode)*1
Remote master AJ71LR21 The step-by-step replacement of
station A1SJ71LR21 the coaxial loop system is not
AJ72LR25 possible.
Coaxial loop
AJ72QLR25 Consider the replacement of the
Remote I/O station
coaxial loop system with the
A1SJ72QLR25
coaxial bus system.
Remote master AJ71BR11
Replacement not required
station A1SJ71BR11
Coaxial bus AJ72BR15
QJ72BR15 (MELSECNET/10
Remote I/O station AJ72QBR15
mode)*1
A1SJ72QBR15

*1 Modules with a serial number (first five digits) of "15012" or later

5 - 36
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Replacement of the QnA/QnAS series

Network type Station type QnA/QnAS series Q series (alternative module)
AJ71QLP21
A1SJ71QLP21
Remote master
AJ71QLP21S Replacement not required
station
A1SJ71QLP21S
Optical loop AJ71QLP21G
AJ72QLP25 QJ72LP25-25 (MELSECNET/10
A1SJ72QLP25 mode)*1
Remote I/O station
QJ72LP25G (MELSECNET/10
AJ72LP25G
mode)*1
Remote master AJ71QLR21 The step-by-step replacement of
station A1SJ71QLR21 the coaxial loop system is not
AJ72QLR25 possible.
Coaxial loop
Consider the replacement of the
Remote I/O station
A1SJ72QLR25 coaxial loop system with the
coaxial bus system.
Remote master AJ71QBR11
Replacement not required
station A1SJ71QBR11
Coaxial bus
AJ72QBR15 QJ72BR15 (MELSECNET/10
Remote I/O station
A1SJ72QBR15 mode)*1

*1 Modules with a serial number (first five digits) of "15012" or later

5 - 37
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.2.2 Module performance specifications comparisons

(1) Comparison of AJ72LP25/AJ72QLP25/A1SJ72QLP25 and QJ72LP25-25 (MELSECNET/10

mode)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, ×: Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ72QLP25 QJ72LP25-25 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ72LP25
A1SJ72QLP25 (MELSECNET/10 mode)

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points
network LW 8192 points
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
Maximum number of link {(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
points per station <Remote I/O station  remote master station>
(LY + LB) 8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of I/O
X+Y 2048 points X+Y 2048 points*1 X+Y 2048 points
points per remote I/O station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255
239 Network No.240 to No.250 cannot
Maximum number of (Total number of PLC to
(Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote be set. Replace them with unused
networks PLC networks and
I/O networks) network No.
remote I/O networks)
Number of stations connected
65 stations (Remote master station: 1, remote I/O station: 64)
in one network
SI optical cable, H-PCF optical cable, broad-band H-PCF optical cable, QSI
Applicable cable
optical cable
Overall distance 30km
SI optical cable: 500m, H-PCF optical cable: 1km
Distance between stations
Broad-band H-PCF optical cable: 1km, QSI optical cable: 1km
Error control system CRC (X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over

Loop-back function due to error detection or disconnection of a cable

Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function
Abnormal detection using the link special relay and link special register
Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions

Monitoring, program up/download with a peripheral device For comparison of dedicated link
Transient transmission
Dedicated link instruction instructions, refer to Section 5.1.7.

*1 For the A1SJ72QLP25, the maximum number of I/O points per remote I/O station is "X + Y 1024 points".

5 - 38
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(2) Comparison of AJ72LP25G/AJ72QLP25G and QJ72LP25G (MELSECNET/10 mode)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item QJ72LP25G Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ72LP25G AJ72QLP25G
(MELSECNET/10 mode)

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points
network LW 8192 points
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
Maximum number of link {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
points per station <Remote I/O station  remote master station>
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of I/O
X+Y 2048 points X+Y 2048 points
points per remote I/O station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token ring method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI coding (Non Return to Zero Inverted)
Transmission method Duplex loop
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255
239 Network No.240 to No.250 cannot
Maximum number of (Total number of PLC to
(Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote be set. Replace them with unused
networks PLC networks and
I/O networks) network No.
remote I/O networks)
Number of stations connected
65 stations (Master station: 1, remote I/O station: 64)
in one network
Applicable cable GI optical cable
Overall distance 30km
Distance between stations GI optical cable: 2km
Error control system CRC (X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over

Loop-back function due to error detection or disconnection of a cable

Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function
Abnormal detection using the link special relay and link special register
Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions

Monitoring, program up/download with a peripheral device For comparison of dedicated link
Transient transmission
Dedicated link instruction instructions, refer to Section 5.1.7.

5 - 39
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(3) Comparison of AJ72BR15/AJ72QBR15/A1SJ72QBR15 and QJ72BR15 (MELSECNET/10

mode)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Specifications
Item AJ72QBR15 QJ72BR15 Compatibility Precautions for replacement
AJ72BR15
A1SJ72QBR15 (MELSECNET/10 mode)

Maximum number LX/LY 8192 points

of link points per LB 8192 points
network LW 8192 points
<Remote master station  remote I/O station>
Maximum number of link {(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
points per station <Remote I/O station  remote master station>
{(LY + LB)  8 + (2 × LW)} 1600 bytes
Maximum number of I/O
X+Y 2048 points X+Y 2048 points*1 X+Y 2048 points
points per remote I/O station
Communication speed 10Mbps
Communication method Token bus method
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method
Encoding method Manchester code
Transmission method Single bus
Transmission format HDLC standards (frame format)
255
239 Network No.240 to No.250 cannot
Maximum number of (Total number of PLC to
(Total number of PLC to PLC networks and remote be set. Replace them with unused
networks PLC networks and
I/O networks) network No.
remote I/O networks)
Number of stations connected
33 stations (Master station: 1, remote I/O station: 32)
in one network
Applicable cable 3C-2V, 5C-2V, 5C-FB
Overall distance 30km
3C-2V: 300m
Distance between stations
5C-2V, 5C-FB: 500m
Error control system CRC (X16 + X12 + X5 + 1) and retry by a time over

Loop-back function due to error detection or disconnection of a cable

Diagnostic function for checking local link lines
RAS function
Abnormal detection using the link special relay and link special register
Network monitoring and various diagnostic functions

Monitoring, program up/download with a peripheral device For comparison of dedicated link
Transient transmission
Dedicated link instruction instructions, refer to Section 5.1.7

*1 For the A1SJ72QBR15, the maximum number of I/O points per remote I/O station is "X + Y 1024 points".

5 - 40
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.2.3 Functional comparisons

To use a MELSECNET/H remote I/O module (MELSECNET/10 mode), the CPU module on the master
station must be an AnU/AnUS/QnA/QnAS series module. For details on functions of a remote I/O
module, refer to a manual for the CPU module used on the master station because the functions differ
depending on which CPU module is used on the master station.
The following table lists function differences among module series.

Description
Item A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series MELSECNET/H module Compatibility Precautions for replacement
MELSECNET/10 module (MELSECNET/10 mode)
Communicating with a special
Performs communications with each module on the remote I/O
function module
station using X/Y (LX/LY) and B/W (LB/LW).
(Cyclic transfer function)
Check and modify a program because
Reads or writes data from/to the buffer memory of the special buffer memory addresses of intelligent
Dedicated link instruction
function module on the remote I/O station. function modules differ between A/AnS/
QnA/QnAS series and Q series.
Set the configuration with the PLC
I/O assignment function Sets the module configuration of the remote I/O station.
parameter of the remote I/O module.*1
The number of transient transmissions
executed during one link scan differs
ZNFR/ZNTO instruction access Sets the number of transient transmissions that can be executed depending on the total number of slave
number setting function during one link scan (a total of entire one network). stations. The number of transient
transmissions executed for one station
is the same, though.
Blown fuse error and input/output Set whether to enable or disable the
Sets whether to enable or disable the error check of a blown fuse
verification error check disabled error check with the PLC parameter of
error and an input/output verification error.
function the remote I/O module.
Sets an operation mode to be used when a blown fuse error or an Set an operation mode with the PLC
Operation mode at an error
input/output verification error occurs. parameter of the remote I/O module.

*1 Change the network parameter of the master station as well. For details, refer to Section 5.2.6.

5 - 41
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.2.4 Switch setting comparisons

(1) Switch setting comparisons of remote master stations

The switch setting change is not required because the remote master station is not replaced.

(2) Switch setting comparisons of remote I/O stations

Description
Switch name A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Q series MELSECNET/H module Compatibility Precautions for replacement
MELSECNET/10 module (MELSECNET/10 mode)
[Using QJ72LP25-25]
Sets the mode.
<Setting range>
0: Online (10Mbps)
Sets the mode.
1: Self-loopback test (10Mbps)
<Setting range>
2: Internal self-loopback test (10Mbps) • When using a MELSECNET/H
0: Online
3: Hardware test (10Mbps) module in MELSECNET/10 mode,
2: Offline
4: Online (25Mbps) set the mode to "8".
3: Loop test (forward loop)*2 5: Self-loopback test (25Mbps) • Set offline and loop test in GX
Mode setting 4: Loop test (reverse loop)*2 6: Internal self-loopback test (25Mbps) Developer network parameters.
switch 5: Station-to-station test (master 7: Hardware test (25Mbps) • Substitute the forward loop/reverse
station) 8: Online (MELSECNET/10 mode)*1 loop test for the station-to-station test.
6: Station-to-station test (slave station) • Check network No., group No. and
[Using QJ72LP25G and QJ72BR15]
7: Self-loopback test station No. in GX Developer network
Sets the mode.
8: Internal self-loopback test diagnostics (host information).
<Setting range>
9: H/W test
0: Online
F: Station No. check
1: Self-loopback test
2: Internal self-loopback test
3: Hardware test
8: Online (MELSECNET/10 mode)*1

*1 This mode (8; Online (MELSECNET/10 mode)) is added to a module with a serial number (first five digits) of "15012" or
later.
*2 This mode is not used for the coaxial bus system.

5 - 42
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.2.5 Parameter comparisons

(1) Parameters of remote master station

Basically, the parameter change is not required because A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series modules are
continuously used for the remote master station.
However, for a Q series MELSECNET/H remote I/O module (MELSECNET/10 mode), some parameters
must be set at the remote I/O station instead of at the master station, and therefore the setting change of
an existing module at the master station is required. For details, refer to Section 5.2.6.

(2) Parameters of remote I/O station

When mounting an intelligent function module on a remote I/O station, set parameters.
When the remote I/O station consists of only I/O modules, the modules operate without parameter
settings. (In such a case, the modules operate with the default values.)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Description
Parameter Q series
A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series Compatibility Precautions for replacement
name MELSECNET/H module
MELSECNET/10 module
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
• New parameter of MELSECNET/H
(The number of empty slots is set.)
- PLC system setting • For an A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series module, the number is set in
I/O assignments of the network parameter at the master
station.
• New parameter of MELSECNET/H
(The operation mode to be used or whether to enable the
error check at an error are set.)
- PLC RAS setting
• For an A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series module, the PLC RAS
setting of PLC parameter at the master station is relected to
the remote I/O network.
PLC • New parameter of MELSECNET/H
parameter - Operation setting - (The parameters for data transmission between devices are
set.)
• New parameter of MELSECNET/H
(The I/O assignments of the remote I/O station are set.)
• For an A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series module, the I/O assignments
are set in I/O assignments of the network parameter at the
master station.
- I/O assignment setting
Therefore, at the replacement, if the I/O assignments are
already set at the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series module on the
master station, the setting change is required.
• To mount an intelligent function module on a remote I/O
station, the switch setting is required for the I/O assignments.
• New parameter of MELSECNET/H
Ethernet - (The network parameter of an Ethernet module mounted on
Network the remote I/O station is set.)
-
parameter • New parameter of MELSECNET/H
CC-Link - (The network parameter of a CC-Link module mounted on the
remote I/O station is set.)
• New parameter of MELSECNET/H
Remote (The remote password of a module (such as an Ethernet
- Remote password setting -
password module or a serial communication module) mounted on the
remote I/O station is set.)

5 - 43
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.2.6 Program comparisons

This section describes how to modify the existing programs when replacing MELSECNET/10 remote I/O
stations with MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/10 mode) remote I/O stations.

(1) Link special relay (SB)/link special register

Program modifications related to link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) are not required
because the link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) of the CPU module on the master
station are used.

For details, refer to either of following manuals according to the CPU module used on the master
station.
Type MELSECNET/10 Network System (Remote I/O network) Reference Manual
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual

(2) Network parameters

(a) Master station
The items specific to remote I/O stations (such as I/O assignments of a remote I/O station) must be
set at the remote I/O station. Therefore, delete these items from the network parameter of the master
station. For details on the items set at the remote I/O station, refer to Section 5.2.5.
(b) Remote I/O station
Set the necessary parameters (refer to Section 5.2.5) at the remote I/O station.
If the parameters are not set, modules operate with the default settings and these operations may
differ from the desired ones.
When mounting an intelligent function module, configure the switch setting for I/O assignments.

The figures below show the setting example of I/O assignments on the following conditions; the
system has one remote I/O station, the system configurations before and after the replacement are
the same, and an intelligent function module is mounted on the remote I/O station.

I/O assignments of the remote I/O station (set in the network parameter at the existing master station)

Delete the parameters to set them on the remote I/O station side.

5 - 44
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

I/O assignments of the remote I/O station (set in the network parameter at the remote I/O station after
the replacement)

The address change is not required when the number of occupied points and
start XY address are set on the remote I/O station side.

The switch setting is required

when an intelligent function module is used.
Switch setting example

5 - 45
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

(3) Utilizing existing programs

If the system configurations before and after the replacement are the same, program modifications are
not required.
When an intelligent function module is mounted on the remote I/O station, the buffer memory read or
write functions using the dedicated link instruction of the CPU module on the master station. In such a
case, if the specifications such as I/O signals or buffer memory addresses are different between the
modules before and after the replacement, a program modification is required.
The figure below shows the example of modifying the program related to the dedicated link instruction
when the CPU module on the master station is the AnUCPU and the A62DA (analog output module) is
replaced with the Q62DAN.

Program related to the dedicated link instruction of the existing AnUCPU

* Write data to the buffer memory area in the analog output side.

41

43

* Check the output value write completion.

76

* Change SUB H0 into SUB H1 because the buffer memory address

for writing the analog output value of the Q62DAN changes H1.

For details on replacements of intelligent function modules, refer to the following.

Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function
Modules)
Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Intelligent Function
Modules)

5 - 46
5 REPLACEMENT OF THE MELSECNET/10 (REMOTE I/O NETWORK)

5.2.7 Last stage of the replacement

This section describes the last stage of the step-by-step replacement of the MELSECNET/10 remote I/O
stations with the MELSECNET/H remote I/O stations. The replacement is conducted by using the
MELSECNET/10 mode of MELSECNET/H remote I/O modules.

(1) Last stage of the replacement

A MELSECNET/H remote I/O module (MELSECNET/10 mode) can be used when the CPU module on
the master station is A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series.
When replacing the CPU module on the master station with a Q series module, replace the network as
well (from MELSECNET/10 remote I/O to MELSECNET/H remote I/O). In this case, Q series modules
are used for all remote I/O stations.
The last stage of the step-by-step replacement of the MELSECNET/10 remote I/O network is when the
CPU module on the master station is replaced with a Q series module.

(2) How to replace the master station

Replace the master station in the same way as the MELSECNET/10 remote I/O is collectively replaced.
For details, refer to Section 5.1.

(3) How to replace remote I/O stations

For MELSECNET/H remote I/O modules at the step-by-step replacement, the mode setting switches
are set to MELSECNET/10 mode "8".
At the last stage of the replacement where the network is replaced with the MELSECNET/H remote I/O,
if the mode setting switches are changed to Online (MELSECNET/H mode) "0" or "4", all of the modules
on the stations can be used as they are.
Note that to use the buffer memory read or write of an intelligent function module, program checks and
modifications are required for the dedicated link instructions (from the A series instructions to the Q
series instructions).

5 - 47
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

6
CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO
6

MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A

GATEWAY STATION

When adding QCPU to the existing MELSECNET(II) network system or replacing some programmable
controller CPUs in the system with QCPUs, data will be shared by installing a gateway station, which
relays cyclic communication data, between MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET(II).
This chapter describes the method to perform cyclic communication data relay between the existing
MELSECNET(II) network system and the new MELSECNET/10 network system using a gateway set.

6.1 Application of Gateway Station Using Gateway Set

Gateway set is a set of modules required to work as a gateway station, where passes and shares the
link data between MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/10, based on the network system
(communication medium (cable)).

(1) Adding QCPU to the existing MELSECNET(II) network system

(Example)
A1

A1 GW MELSEC
Q6
A2 station NET/10

A2 A5 MELSECNET
MELSECNET (II)
(II)
A3 A5
A gateway station is
A3 A4
introduced into a part of A4
the A/AnS series system to
[System before transition] add a Q series system. [System after transition]

Gateway set (Gateway station)

Master
station

Q2AS MNET MNET Qn MNET I/O (1) The system for the added Q series is built
Local (II) /10 /10 with MELCECNET/10.
MELSECNET MELSECNET/10
station
(II) Local Control Normal
station station station (2) The MELSECNET/10 system is
connected to the MELSECNET(II) system
Local with the gateway station
station

* The existing A/Ans series system is used

as it is.

Since QCPUs are incompatible with MELSECNET(II), the network system is built in MELSECNET/10 by
adding a gateway station to the existing MELSECNET(II) network system.
The gateway station passes and shares the link data between MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/10 by
inter-link data transfer parameter or sequence program.

6-1
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

(2) Replacing CPU in existing MELSECNET(II) with QCPU in stages

(Example)
A1 A1 Q1
Q5

A2 A5 A2 MELSEC Q2 Q5
MELSECNET NET GW
MELSECNET MELSECNET
(II) station
(II) /10 /10(H)

A gateway station is Replacement is performed

A3 A4 A3 Q4 Q3 Q4
introduced to replace in stages to shift the
the system with the system to the Q series
[System before transition] Q series system in stages. [Transition steps] system. [System after transition]

Gateway set (Gateway station)

Qn MNET I/O (1) For the stations replaced with the Q series,
Master /10 the system is built with MELSECNET/10.
station Normal
station (2) The MELSECNET/10 system is connected
Q2AS MNET MNET
Local (II) /10 to the MELSECNET(II) system with the
MELSECNET MELSECNET/10
station (II) gateway station.
Local Control
station station
Qn MNET I/O
(3) The stations are replaced with the Q series
/10
Local in stages to shift the system to the Q series
station Normal
station
system.

The system is shifted to the MELSECNET/H(10) network system by replacing A/AnS/QnA/QnASCPUs

in the existing MELSECNET(II) network system with QCPUs in stages until all CPUs are replaced by
QCPUs.
When the existing network is the remote I/O network or the network comprising local stations and
remote I/O stations, the remote I/O stations must be replaced all at once.
Mount two modules for PLC to PLC network control station or normal station and remote I/O network
master station to the replaced QCPU, and then replace remote I/O stations all at once.

Point
(1) Parameter settings when the gateway station CPU does not have a control program
When data transmission/reception between the gateway station CPU and network module is not
necessary, data can be relayed only by setting network parameters and inter-link data
transfer parameters. (Refer to Section 6.4)
(2) Parameter settings when the cyclic transmission data is read to the gateway station CPU
When the cyclic transmission data is read to the gateway station CPU, the network parameter and
inter-link data transfer parameter, depending on the setting contents, sometimes do not match
with the link refresh parameter. In this case, perform cyclic transmission data relay between
MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/10 by sequence program. (Refer to Section 6.5)
(3) Number of B/W points assigned to one station
Maximum points can be relayed are 1k bytes (first half)/1k bytes (second half) for MELSECNET(II)
and 2000 bytes for MELSECNET/10. For this reason, cyclic data of entire network may not be
relayed. It is necessary to narrow down the range of cyclic data to be relayed by setting priorities.

6-2
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

6.2 List of Gateway Set Models

The following list shows gateway set models for a gateway station.
Select a model based on the existing MELSECNET(II) system configuration and the newly added
MELSECNET/10 system configuration.
If the system configuration does not apply to any gateway set models in the list, select and purchase
each module for base part, MELSECNET(II) part, and MELSECNET/10 part individually, and then set
them up as a gateway station.

List of gateway set models

Set model Base MELSECNET(II), /B MELSECNET/10
Q6KT-NETGW-SS A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71QLP21
Q6KT-NETGW-RS A1SJ71QLP21
A1SJ71AR21
Q6KT-NETGW-RB A1S35B A1S61PN Q2ASCPU A1SJ71QBR11
Q6KT-NETGW-TS A1SJ71QLP21
A1SJ71AT21B
Q6KT-NETGW-TB A1SJ71QBR11

1) Network type: MELSECNET(II) 2) Network type: MELSECNET/10

How to read Q6KT-NETGW- S: SI optical fiber cable (double loop) S: SI optical fiber cable (double loop)
model name R: Coaxial cable (double loop) B: Coaxial cable (bus)
Gateway set 1) 2) T: Twisted pair cable (bus)

6-3
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

6.3 Precautions for Use of Gateway Set

(1) Link data and function

The following shows link data and function.
Item Detailed description
MELSECNET(II) to MELSECNET/10: 2000 bytes
Number of link data*1
MELSECNET/10 to MELSECNET(II): first half 1024 bytes, second half 1024 bytes
Cyclic data (LB/LW)
Link data
(Cyclic data (LX/LY), link special relay/register, and transient transmission cannot be relayed.)
Network diagnostics *2 Diagnostics are required in the MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/10 respectively.

*1 The number of B/W points assigned to one station is limited.

Since all data cannot be relayed, narrow down the data to be relayed by setting priorities.
*2 Both network diagnostics can be performed by connecting GX Developer to the gateway station.

(2) Cyclic data transmission delay

Transmission delay shall be the time that relay processing delay time is added to each cyclic
transmission delay time in the MELSECNET(II) system and the MELSECNET/10 system.
Confirm that the delay does not affect the control on modules.

(3) Restrictions on system configuration

(a) Set the MELSECNET(II) side of gateway station as local station in the second tier.
According to the MELSECNET(II) specifications, local station cannot be mounted as a gateway
station on one CPU because of the local station in the second tier and master station for the third
tier combination restriction.
When the existing master station is AnU/AnUS(H)CPU or QnA/QnASCPU and the
MELSECNET/10 module is added as a gateway station with the existing MELSECNET(II)
configured as is, there are no restrictions.
(b) At the gateway station, elongation and variation of the scan time may occur due to link refreshes
of both MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/10.
It is recommended that the gateway station only shall relay the link data and avoid control
program.

[Common precautions]
1) For a relay station, use the AnU/AnUS(H)/QnA/QnASCPU that supports MELSECNET(II) and
MELSECNET/10 modules.
Modules other than those cannot serve as a relay station.
2) Due to link refresh among the CPU module, MELSECNET(II) module, and MELSECNET/10
module on the relay station, the scan time may be delayed or varied.
Using the CPU module only for link refresh processing is recommended.

6-4
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

6.4 Communication Between Existing ACPU in MELSECNET(II) and Added

QCPU (Data Transmission/Reception by Inter-link Data Transfer)

This section describes the method to perform data transmission/reception between existing A/AnSCPU
in MELSECNET(II) and added QCPU by inter-link data transfer using a gateway set.

(1) System configuration example

(a) Configuration of the existing MELSECNET(II)
An example of the existing system configuration is as follows: master station (M:A3ACPU), local
station 1 (L1:A2ACPU), and local station 2 (L2:A1SHCPU).

MELSECNET 2-tier

L1 L2

(b) Configuration after QCPU addition

By newly adding the gateway station (Q2ASCPU:L3/1Mp1) to the above configuration 1) and
connecting it to the QCPU (1NS2) in MELSECNET/10, link data relay is performed between
MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/10.

MELSECNET
L1 L3/1Mp1 MELSECNET/10 1Ns2
2-tier

L2

Gateway set (Gateway station)

6-5
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

(2) Network range assignment for MELSECNET(II)

(a) Existing B/W network range assignment

B/W 0 100 200 300 3FF

M L1 L2 Empty

(b) B/W network range assignment after addition of the gateway station (L3/1Mp1)

B/W 0 100 200 300 3FF

M L1 L2 L3

MELSECNET/10 data receiving area

by inter-link data transfer

When the data is transferred from MELSECNET/10 to MELSECNET(II), B/W300 to 3FF shall be the
transfer area.

(3) Network range assignment for MELSECNET/10

B/W1000 1100 1200 1300 1FFF

1Mp1 1Ns2 Empty

MELSECNET(II) data receiving area

by inter-link data transfer

When the data is transferred from MELSECNET(II) to MELSECNET/10, B/W1000 to 11FF shall be the
transfer area.
Since all points cannot be transferred from MELSECNET(II) to MELSECNET/10, narrow down the data
to be relayed by setting priorities.
Set the data to be transferred at the inter-link data transfer.

6-6
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

(4) Example of inter-link data transfer

Up to 1k bytes (first half) transferable

B/W0 (M) 100(L1) 200(L2) 300(L3) 3FF

MELSECNET(II) side

MELSECNET/10 side

B/W1000 1100 1200 1300 1FFF

Empty

Up to 2000 bytes transferable

(5) Network parameter settings

(a) MELSECNET master station
The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET master station (A3ACPU).
• Network parameter settings (A3ACPU:MELSECNET master station)

• Network range assignment LB/LW settings (A3ACPU:MELSECNET master station)

6-7
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

(b) Gateway station (Q2ASCPU:L3/1Mp1)

The following shows the network parameter settings of the gateway station
(Q2ASCPU:L3/1Mp1).
• Network parameter settings (Q2ASCPU:L3/1Mp1)

• Network range assignment BW settings (Q2ASCPU:L3/1Mp1)

• Module 1 (MNET local station) refresh parameter

6-8
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

(c) Module 2 (MNET/10 control station) refresh parameter

(d) Inter-link data transfer module 1

Since all points cannot be transferred from MELSECNET(II) to MELSECNET/10, narrow down the
data to be relayed by setting priorities.

• From MELSECNET/10 to MELSECNET(II)

6-9
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

6.5 Communication Between Existing ACPU in MELSECNET(II) and Added

QCPU Using Gateway Set (Data Transmission/Reception by Sequence
Program)

This section describes the method to perform data transmission/reception between existing A/AnSCPU
in MELSECNET(II) and added QCPU by sequence program using a gateway set.
This method is useful when the link refresh parameter in the inter-link data transfer cannot be set
because the transmission range of MELSECNET(II) is located in the middle.

(1) System configuration example

(a) Configuration of the existing MELSECNET(II)
An example of the existing system configuration is as follows: master station (M:A3ACPU), local
station 1 (L1:A2ACPU), local station 2 (L2:A1SHCPU), remote I/O station 3 (R3), and remote I/O
station 4 (R4).

L1 M

MELSECNET II
L2 composite mode
2-tier

R3 R4

(b) Configuration after QCPU addition

By newly adding the gateway station (Q2ASCPU:L5/1Mp1) to the above configuration 1) and
connecting it to the QCPU (1Ns2) in MELSECNET/10, link data relay is performed between
MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/10.

L1 M

MELSECNET II MELSECNET10
L2 composite mode L5/1Mp1 1Ns2
2-tier

R3 R4

Gateway set (Gateway station)

6 - 10
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

(2) Network range assignment for MELSECNET(II)

(a) LX/LY network range assignment
X/Y 0 200 400 500 600 7FF

Actual I/O Empty R3 R4 Empty

(b) BW network range assignment before addition of the gateway station (L5/1Mp1)
(Assignment in the area of 200 to 3FF is W only.)

B/W0 100 200 260 300 380 400 500 5FF

M first L1 first L2 Empty R3 R4 R3 R4 M second half L1 second half

half half

M R M R

(c) BW network range assignment after addition of the gateway station (L5/1Mp1)
(Assignment in the area of 200 to 3FF is W only.)
B/W 0 100 200 260 300 380 400 500 600 6FF
M first L1 first L2 L5 first R3 R4 R3 R4 M second half L1 second half L5 second half
half half half

MELSECNET/10 data M R M R MELSECNET/10 data

receiving area by receiving area by
inter-link data transfer inter-link data transfer

When the data is transferred from MELSECNET/10 to MELSECNET(II), B/W260 to 3FF shall be the
transfer area.
Note that only the data required for QCPU(1NS2) are transferred to MELSECNET(II).

(3) Network range assignment for MELSECNET/10

B/W1000 1100 1200 1260 1300 1FFF

1Mp1 1Ns2 Empty

MELSECNET(II) data receiving area

by inter-link data transfer

When the data is transferred from MELSECNET(II) to MELSECNET/10, B/W1000 to 11FF shall be the
transfer area.
Since all points cannot be transferred from MELSECNET(II) to MELSECNET/10, narrow down the data
to be transferred by setting priorities.

6 - 11
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

(4) Network parameter settings

(a) MELSECNET II composite master station
The following shows the network parameter settings of the MELSECNET II composite master station
(A3ACPU).
• Network parameter settings (A3ACPU:MELSECNET II composite master station)

• Network range assignment LX/LY (A3ACPU:MELSECNET II composite master station)

• Network range assignment first half LB/LW settings (A3ACPU:MELSECNET II composite

master station)

6 - 12
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

• Network range assignment first half LB/LW settings (A3ACPU:MELSECNET II composite

master station)

(b) Gateway station (Q2ASCPU:L5/1Mp1)

The following shows the network parameter settings of the gateway station (Q2ASCPU:L5/1Mp1).

• Network parameter settings (Q2ASCPU:L5/1Mp1)

• Network range assignment BW settings (Q2ASCPU:L5/1Mp1)

6 - 13
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

• Module 1 (MELSECNET local station) refresh parameter

• Module 2 (MELSECNET/10 control station) refresh parameter

(5) How to transfer data

(a) Transfer from MELSECNET(II) to MELSECNET/10
Write the data of MELSECNET(II) into the host station range of the gateway station (1Mp1) using the
BMOV instruction.
Since all points cannot be transferred from MELSECNET(II) to MELSECNET/10, narrow down the
data to be relayed by setting priorities.
(b) Transfer from MELSECNET/10 to MELSECNET(II)
Write all data of MELSECNET/10 into the host station range of the gateway station (L5) using the
BMOV instruction.
Write all data to be used in the master station (M:A3ACPU), local station 1 (L1:A2ACPU), and local
station 2 (L2:A1SHCPU) into the first half LB/LW of L5.
Data cannot be used in the local station 2 (L2:A1SHCPU), which is incompatible with
MELSECNET II, can be transferred using the second half LB/LW of L5.

6 - 14
6 CONNECTING MELSECNET/10 TO MELSECNET(II) AND /B WITH A
GATEWAY STATION

Sample program

6 - 15
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

7
CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE
7

MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE

LOCAL STATION

When adding the QCPU to or replacing a module with the QCPU in the existing MELSECNET(II), /B,
connect the QCPU as the local station without changing the existing network and perform cyclic
communication for sharing data.
This chapter describes methods for connecting the QCPU to the existing MELSECNET(II), /B as the
local station.

7.1 Application that Connects the QCPU as the Local Station

(1) Replacing a module with the QCPU without changing the existing network
(Example)

A1 A1 Replaced station

A2 MELSECNET A4 A2 MELSECNET Q4
(II) (II)
Replace the A series
programmable controller
A3 with the Q series A3
programmable controller
[System before transition] [System after transition]

Master station Q series programmable controller

main base unit
Qn I/O I/O I/O I/O
C
P
U
(High Performance model QCPU)
I/O I/O
Local station MELSECNET
(II)

(QA1S6 B)

Local station data link module

Local station

By mounting the local station data link module, the QCPU replaced by the A/AnSCPU can communicate
as the local station without changing the existing network link assignment even after CPU replacement.

Point
For precautions of when connecting the QCPU as a local station, refer to Section 1.1.3.

7-1
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

(2) Adding the QCPU to the existing network

(Example)
Added station
A1 A1

A2 Q5
A2 MELSECNET A4 MELSECNET
(II) (II)
Adding the Q series
programmable controller
A3 to the A series A3 A4
programmable controllers

[System before transition] [System after transition]

Q series programmable controller

Master station main base unit
Qn I/O I/O I/O I/O
C
P
U
(High Performance model QCPU)
I/O I/O
Local station MELSECNET
(II)

(QA1S6 B)

Local station data link module

Local station Local station

When the QCPU is added to the existing network, it can communicate as the local station using the
existing network link assignment by mounting the local station data link module.

Point
For precautions of when connecting the QCPU as a local station, refer to Section 1.1.3.

7-2
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

7.2 List of Local Station Data Link Module

The following models are available to connect the QCPU with the existing MELSECNET(II), /B.
Select a model according to the existing network system.

Model Product name

A1SJ71AP23Q MELSECNET(II) local station data link module for optical fiber cable (SI)
A1SJ71AR23Q MELSECNET(II) local station data link module for coaxial cable
A1S71AT23BQ MELSECNET/B local station data link module for shielded twisted pair cable

7.3 Precautions for Using Local Station Data Link Module

This section describes precautions for using the local station data link module.

(1) Precautions for selection

When connecting the QCPU to the MELSECNET(II), /B, the existing data link module cannot be used.
Make sure to select a module from Model list in Section 7.2.

(2) Available CPUs and mountable base units

For details on QCPUs where a local station data link module can be used and on mountable base units,
refer to Section 1.1.3.

(3) Number of mountable modules

Up to six local station data link modules can be mounted to one CPU module.
When using the module such as the AD51H, which can be mounted to the "QA1S6B" or "QA6B" but
the number of mountable modules are restricted,

(4) Precautions for three-tier system

If the replaced station is the master station for the third tier, since the QCPU cannot be the
MELSECNET(II) master station, measures such as replacing the MELSECNET/H (10) to the third tier
are required.

7-3
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

7.4 Network Parameter

This section describes network parameter for local station data link module.

(1) Setting the number of MELSECNET/Ethernet cards

The local station data link module does not require network parameter setting.
After configuring the network, the module performs parameter communications with the master station,
and automatically acquires information necessarily for the network such as send range assignment for
each station.

(2) Network refresh parameter

Link refresh is not automatically performed.
Therefore, create the sequence program which sends/receives data using the FROM/TO instructions for
data transfer.
For details of I/O signals for program creation and buffer memory address, refer to the following manual.
Reference manual
MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B Local Station Data Link Module User's Manual
A necessary program for link refresh is offered by the "A/QnA -> Q conversion support tool" as a sample program.
By integrating the sample program as the QCPU scan execution type program, creating a program becomes
unnecessary.
For "A/QnA to Q conversion support tool", contact your local representative.

(3) Sample program

The following shows conditions of a sample program for link refresh.
1) Condition 1 (Only for the MELSECNET mode and second tier)
• Number of mounted local station data link modules: 1
• Module mounting address: X/Y200 to 21F slot
• Network type: MELSECNET mode
• Send range for each station setting: Only first half set
• Master station for the third tier B/W receive program: None
• Program for receiving LRDP instruction: None
• Program for receiving LWDP instruction: None
• X/Y link: None
• Refresh device (bit): B00 to 3FF
• Refresh device (word): W00 to 3FF

Master station Q series programmable controller

main base unit
Qn I/O I/O I/O I/O Target QCPU for
C the sample program
P
U

(High Performance model QCPU)

I/O I/O
Local station MELSECNET
mode

(QA1S6 B)

Local station data link module

Local station

7-4
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

• Setting examples of the A/QnA-Q conversion support tool

(Condition setting)

(Refresh device setting)

7-5
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

Save the relevant device data in the save area.

When powered ON, Initialize B/W devices.

Transfer W to the local module.

Transfer B to the local module.

RUN status

Refresh request
In refresh ready status, start refresh.

No refresh request

Refresh in execution

Obtain whether the refresh

information table is present or not.
W transmission (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Transfer W of the host station to

the local module. (First half)
B transmission (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Transfer B of the host station to

the local module. (First half)

7-6
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

W device reception 1 (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Obtain W of the other stations from

the local module. (First half)
W device reception 2 (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Obtain W of the other stations from

the local module. (First half)
B device reception 1 (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Obtain B of the other stations from

the local module. (First half)
B device reception 2 (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Obtain B of the other stations from

Transfer the special relay for link (from M9240) to SM1240. the local module. (First half)
Transfer the special register for link (from D9243) to SD1243.

Refresh completion
Obtain data of the special relay
(for link).

Obtain data of the special register

(for link).

Turn OFF the refresh in execution.

Restore the relevant device data.

7-7
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

2) Condition 2 (Only for the MELSECNET II mode three-tier system)

• Number of mounted local station data link modules: 1
• Module mounting address: X/Y200 to 21F slot
• Network type: MELSECNET II mode
• Send range for each station setting: Both first half and latter half set
• Master station for the second tier B/W receive program: None (except the local station for the
second tier)
• Program for receiving LRDP instruction: Exists
• Program for receiving LWDP instruction: Exists
• X/Y link: Exists
• Refresh device (bit): B00 to FFF
• Refresh device (word): W00 to FFF

Second tier Master station Q series programmable controller

main base unit
Qn I/O I/O I/O I/O Target QCPU for
C the sample program
P
U
(High Performance model QCPU)
I/O I/O
Local station MELSECNET II
mode

(QA1S6 B)

Local station data link module

Local station/
Master station
Third-tier for the third tier

Local station MELSECNET II Local station

mode

Local station

7-8
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

• Setting examples of the A/QnA-Q conversion support tool

(Condition setting)

(Refresh device setting)

7-9
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

Save the relevant device data in the save area.

When powered ON, Initialize B/W devices.

Turn OFF the refresh request.

Turn ON the refresh request.

RUN status

Refresh request
In refresh ready status, start refresh.

No refresh request

Refresh in execution

Obtain whether the refresh

W transmission (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1 information table is present or not.

Transfer W of the host station to

the local module. (First half)
W transmission (Latter half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Transfer W of the host station to

the local module. (Latter half)

7 - 10
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

Y device transmission: Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Transfer Y of the host station to the

local module.
B transmission (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Transfer B of the host station to the

B transmission (Latter half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1 local module. (First half)

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Transfer B of the host station to the

local module. (Latter half)
W device reception 1 (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Obtain W of the other stations from

the local module. (First half)
W device reception 2 (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Obtain W of the other stations from

W device reception 1 (Latter half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1 the local module. (First half)

Obtain W of the other stations from

the local module. (Latter half)

7 - 11
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

W device reception 2 (Latter half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Obtain W of the other stations from

the local module. (Latter half)
X device reception: Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).
Obtain X of the host station from
the local module.
B device reception 1 (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Obtain B of the other stations from

the local module. (First half)
B device reception 2 (First half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Obtain B of the other stations from

the local module. (First half)
B device reception 1 (Latter half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Obtain B of the other stations from

the local module. (Latter half)

7 - 12
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

B device reception 2 (Latter half): Start No.=Z0, Number of words=Z1

Divide the buffer memory address

by 16 (bits).

Obtain B of the other stations from

Transfer the special relay for link (from M9240) to SM1240. the local module. (Latter half)
Transfer the special register for link (from D9243) to SD1243.
Obtain data of the special relay
(for link).
Obtain data of the special register
(for link).

LRDP instruction receive processing

Obtain the read device name
and start device number.

Obtain the read data length.

Clear the LRDP instruction work

area to zero.

Transfer the T device value to the

work area.

Transfer the C device value to the

work area.

Transfer the D device value to the

work area.

Transfer the W device value to the

work area.

LRDP instruction receive request

(5 = Processing completion)

7 - 13
7 CONNECTING THE QCPU TO THE MELSECNET(II) AND /B AS THE
LOCAL STATION

LWTP instruction receive processing

Obtain the write device name and
start device number.

Obtain the write data length.

Transfer the work area value to T

device.

Transfer the work area value to C

device.

Transfer the work area value to D

device.

Transfer the work area value to W

device.

Clear the LWTP instruction work

area to zero.

LWTP instruction receive request

(5 = Processing completion)
Refresh completion

Turn OFF the refresh in execution.

Turn OFF the refresh request.

Turn ON the refresh request.

Restore the relevant device data.

7 - 14
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8 8REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.1 List of CC-Link Alternative Models

(1) Replacement of the A/AnS series

A/AnS series Alternative models
AJ61BT11
QJ61BT11N*1
A1SJ61BT11

(2) Replacement of the QnA/QnAS series

QnA/QnAS series Alternative models
AJ61QBT11
QJ61BT11N*1
A1SJ61QBT11
*1 The number of mountable CC-Link modules depending on Q series CPU module type is as follows:
Basic model QCPU: 16
High Performance model QCPU: 64
Universal model QCPU: 64
Up to eight modules (Basic model QCPU: up to two modules) can be set using the parameter of GX Developer. To use more
than eight modules (Basic model QCPU: more than two modules), set the parameter using dedicated instructions.
For details, refer to the CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual.

8-1
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.2 Performance Specifications Comparisons

8.2.1 Module performance comparisons

(1) A/AnS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Item
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Can be selected from 156kbps/625kbps/2.5Mbps/5Mbps/
Transmission speed
10Mbps.
Max. cable overall
Differs depending on the transmission speed.
distance (Max.
(Refer to the manual.)
transmission distance)
64 stations
Note that it has to be satisfied with the following conditions.

{(1 × a) + (2 × b) + (3 × c) + (4 × d)} 64
a: Number of 1-station occupied modules
b: Number of 2-station occupied modules
Max. number of stations c: Number of 3-station occupied modules
(For master station) d: Number of 4-station occupied modules

{(16 × A) + (54 × B) + (88 × C)} 2304

A: Number of remote I/O stations 64 stations
B: Number of remote device stations 42 stations
C: Number of local stations, standby master stations and
intelligent device stations 26 stations
Number of occupied 1 to 4 stations (Switched with
1 to 4 stations (Switched with GX Developer parameter
stations GX Developer parameter
DIP switch) settings are required.
(For local station) settings)
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 2048 points
Maximum number of link
Remote register (RWw) : 256 points
points per system
Remote register (RWr) : 256 points
Remote station/local Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 32 points (Local station: 30 points)
station Remote register (RWw) : 4 points
Link points per station Remote register (RWr) : 4 points
Communication method Broad cast polling method
Nothing to be noted
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Flag synchronization method though the methods are
different.
Encoding method NRZI method
Transmission method Bus (RS-485)
Transmission format HDLC standards
Error control system CRC (X16 + X12 + X5 + 1)
CC-Link dedicated cable/CC-Link dedicated high-performance
Connection cable Refer to Section 8.2.2.
cable/Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable
• Automatic return function
RAS function • Slave station detach function
• Error detection with link special relay/register
GX Developer parameter
Number of parameter
settings are performed
registrations to 10,000 times -
instead of the parameter
E2PROM
registration to E2PROM.
Number of occupied I/O 32 points (I/O assignment: 32 points (I/O assignment:
points special 32 points) intelli 32 points)

8-2
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(2) QnA/QnAS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Item
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Can be selected
Transmission speed
from 156kbps/625kbps/2.5Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps.
Max. cable overall
distance Differs depending on the transmission speed.
(Max. transmission (Refer to the manual.)
distance)
64 stations
Note that it has to be satisfied with the following conditions.

{(1 × a) + (2 × b) + (3 × c) + (4 × d)} 64
a: Number of 1-station occupied modules
b: Number of 2-station occupied modules
Max. number of stations c: Number of 3-station occupied modules
(For master station) d: Number of 4-station occupied modules

{(16 × A) + (54 × B) + (88 × C)} 2304

A: Number of remote I/O stations 64 stations
B: Number of remote device stations 42 stations
C: Number of local stations, standby master stations and
intelligent device stations 26 stations
Number of occupied 1 to 4 stations (Switched with
1 to 4 stations (Switched with GX Developer parameter
stations GX Developer parameter
DIP switch) settings are required.
(For local station) settings)
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 2048 points
Maximum number of link
Remote register (RWw) : 256 points
points per system
Remote register (RWr) : 256 points
Remote station/local Remote I/O(RX, RY) : 32 points (Local station: 30 points)
station Remote register (RWw) : 4 points
Link points per station Remote register (RWr) : 4 points
Communication method Broad cast polling method
Nothing to be noted
Synchronous type Frame synchronization method Flag synchronization method though the methods are
different.
Encoding method NRZI method
Transmission method Bus (RS-485)
Transmission format HDLC standards
Error control system CRC (X16 + X12 + X5 + 1)
CC-Link dedicated cable/CC-Link dedicated high-performance
Connection cable Refer to Section 8.2.2.
cable/Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable
• Automatic return function
RAS function • Slave station detach function
• Error detection with link special relay/register
GX Developer parameter
Number of parameter
settings are performed
registrations to 10,000 times -
instead of the parameter
E2PROM
registration to E2PROM.
Number of occupied I/O 32 points (I/O assignment: 32 points (I/O assignment:
points special 32 points) intelli 32 points)

8-3
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.2.2 Cable performance comparisons

CC-Link dedicated cable used on the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series can be also used on the Q series.
For specifications of CC-Link dedicated cable, refer to CC-Link Partner Association home
page: www.cc-link.org

8-4
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.3 Functional Comparisons

(1) A/AnS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Item
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Communication
The communication of ON/OFF information with remote I/O
between master station
station is performed.
and remote I/O station
Communication
The communication of ON/OFF information and numerical data
between master and
with remote device station is performed.
remote device stations
Communication
The communication of ON/OFF information and numerical data
between master station
with local station is performed.
and local station
Communication
between master and The communication is performed with intelligent device station
intelligent device using cyclic transmission and transient transmission.
stations
By setting remote station and local station, which are to be
Reserved station connected in the future, as reserved stations, these stations are
function not treated as data link faulty stations.
If a connected module is specified, no data link is available.
Remote station and local station that cannot perform data link
Error invalid station
due to the power supply off, etc. will not be treated as data link
function
faulty stations with this function.
Data link status setting
at master station The data link status when operation continuation error occurs on
programmable controller the master station programmable controller CPU can be set.
CPU error
Parameter writing is not
GX Developer parameter
required at each startup of
Parameter registration settings are performed
master module by registering -
to E2PROM instead of the parameter
parameters to E2PROM of
registration to E2PROM.
master module.
The input (received) data status (cleared/hold) from the station
Data link faulty station
that has data link error caused by the power supply off, etc. can
input data status setting
be set.
When the switch setting is
Resetting can be performed by
changed, turn the power
the sequence program without
supply of programmable
Module reset function by resetting programmable
- × controller system OFF 
sequence program controller CPU in the case the
ON or reset the
switch setting is changed or an
programmable controller
error has occurred in a module.
CPU.
The stop and restart of data link is available during the data link
Data link stop/restart
execution.
The module disconnected from data link by the power supply off,
Automatic return
etc. can automatically return to data link, when restored to the
function
normal status.
The module that cannot perform data link due to the power
Slave station detach
supply off, etc. is disconnected and data link is kept with normal
function
modules only.
Data link status can be checked.
Data link status check
This check can be used for the interlock etc. of sequence
(SB/SW)
program.
(To next page)

8-5
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Item
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
The following tests can be
The specification method
performed. The following tests can be
of hardware test/line test
• Hardware test: performed.
differs.
Standalone module operation • Hardware test:
For details on the
check Standalone module operation
Offline test specification method,
• Line test: check
refer to the manual.
Module connection status • Line test:
Check the set parameter
check Module connection status
in GX Developer network
• Parameter check test: check
parameters.
Parameter setting check
The following two types of Change from the
parameters are set using the The following two types of parameter settings in the
sequence program (TO parameters are set using GX sequence program (TO
Parameter registration
instruction) or dedicated Developer. instruction) or with
function
instructions. • Network parameter dedicated instructions to
• Network parameter • Automatic refresh parameter the parameter settings
• Automatic refresh parameter with GX Developer.
Synchronous mode: Data link with scan synchronized with
Scan synchronous sequence program is available.
function Asynchronous mode: Data link not synchronized with sequence
program is available.
Data link can be continuously performed by switching to the
Standby master function
standby master station at the master station error.
Dedicated instruction Change the sequence
Transient transmission to intelligent device station and local
(RIRD, RIWT, RIRCV, program as instruction
station is available using dedicated instructions.
RISEND, RIFR, RITO) formats differ.
Delete RRPA instruction
Communication is available for master station and remote I/O
Remote I/O net mode and set parameters with
station only.
GX Developer.
Temporary error invalid Module replacement is available without detecting error of the
station specify function faulty remote station during online.

8-6
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(2) QnA/QnAS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Item
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Communication
The communication of ON/OFF information with remote I/O
between master station
station is performed.
and remote I/O station
Communication
The communication of ON/OFF information and numerical data
between master and
with remote device station is performed.
remote device stations
Communication
The communication of ON/OFF information and numerical data
between master station
with local station is performed.
and local station
Communication
between master and The communication is performed with intelligent device station
intelligent device using cyclic transmission and transient transmission.
stations
By setting remote station and local station, which are to be
Reserved station connected in the future, as reserved stations, these stations are
function not treated as data link faulty stations.
If a connected module is specified, no data link is available.
Remote station and local station that cannot perform data link
Error invalid station
due to the power supply off, etc. will not be treated as data link
function
faulty stations with this function.
Data link status setting
at master station The data link status when operation continuation error occurs on
programmable controller the master station programmable controller CPU can be set.
CPU error
Parameter writing is not
GX Developer parameter
required at each startup of
Parameter registration settings are performed
master module by registering -
to E2PROM instead of the parameter
parameters to E2PROM of
registration to E2PROM.
master module.
The input (received) data status (cleared/held) from the station
Data link faulty station
that has data link error caused by the power supply off, etc. can
input data status setting
be set.
When the switch setting is
Resetting can be performed by
changed, turn the power
the sequence program without
supply of programmable
Module reset function by resetting programmable
- × controller system OFF 
sequence program controller CPU in the case the
ON or reset the
switch setting is changed or an
programmable controller
error has occurred in a module.
CPU.
The stop and restart of data link is available during the data link
Data link stop/restart
execution.
The module disconnected from data link by the power supply off,
Automatic return
etc. can automatically return to data link, when restored to the
function
normal status.
The module that cannot perform data link due to the power
Slave station detach
supply off, etc. is disconnected and data link is kept with normal
function
modules only.
Data link status can be checked.
Data link status check
This check can be used for the interlock etc.of sequence
(SB/SW)
program.
(To next page)

8-7
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Item
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
The following tests can be
The specification method
performed. The following tests can be
of hardware test/line test
• Hardware test: performed.
differs.
Standalone module operation • Hardware test:
For details on the
check Standalone module operation
Offline test specification method,
• Line test: check
refer to the manual.
Module connection status • Line test:
Check the set parameter
check Module connection status
in GX Developer network
• Parameter check test: check
parameters.
Parameter setting check
The following two types of parameters are set using GX
Parameter registration Developer.
function • Network parameter
• Automatic refresh parameter
Synchronous mode: Data link with scan synchronized with
Scan synchronous sequence program is available.
function Asynchronous mode: Data link not synchronized with sequence
program is available.
Data link can be continuously performed by switching to the
Standby master function
standby master station at the master station error.
Dedicated instruction Change the sequence
Transient transmission to intelligent device station and local
(RIRD, RIWT, RIRCV, program as instruction
station is available using dedicated instructions.
RISEND, RIFR, RITO) formats differ.
Replace READ, WRITE
Data sending/receiving to/from
Send/receive instruction instructions with
other station on CC-Link is
(SEND, RECV, READ, dedicated instructions
available. -
SREAD, WRITE, (RIRD, RIWT).
Data reading/writing from/to
SWRITE, REQ) Other instruction cannot
other station is also available.
be replaced.
Communication is available for master station and remote I/O Set parameters with GX
Remote I/O net mode
station only. Developer.
Temporary error invalid Module replacement is available without detecting error of the
station specify function faulty remote station during online.
Line test and link start/stop, etc. can be performed with GX
Online test function
Developer.
Monitoring and Monitoring and diagnosing can be performed from GX
diagnostics Developer.

8-8
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.4 Switch Settings Comparisons

(1) A/AnS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Switch name
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Sets the station No. of the
module.
<Setting range>
• For remote net mode Sets the station No. of the
Master station: 0 module.
Sets the last station No. at
Station number setting Local station: 1 to 64 <Setting range>
remote I/O net mode with
switch Standby master station: 1 to Master station: 0
GX Developer.
64 Local station: 1 to 64
• For remote I/O net mode Standby master station: 1 to 64
Master station: 1 to 64 (The
last station No. of remote I/O
station is set.)
Sets the operation status of the The mode setting and the
Mode setting switch
module. transmission rate setting
are performed with one
Sets the transmission speed
switch.
and operating status of the
Transmission speed Sets the transmission speed of The remote net mode and
module.
setting switch the module. remote I/O net mode are
specified in GX Developer
parameter settings.
Sets the operation conditions.
<Settings> The operating conditions
• Station type are set in the parameter
Condition setting switch • Input data status of data link - settings of GX Developer.
faulty station Module mode setting is
• Number of occupied stations not required.
• Module mode

8-9
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(2) QnA/QnAS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Switch name
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Sets the station No. of the
module.
<Setting range>
• For remote net mode Sets the station No. of the
Master station: 0 module.
Sets the last station No. at
Station number setting Local station: 1 to 64 <Setting range>
remote I/O net mode with
switch Standby master station: 1 to Master station: 0
GX Developer.
64 Local station: 1 to 64
• For remote I/O net mode Standby master station: 1 to 64
Master station: 1 to 64 (The
last station No. of remote I/O
station is set.)
Sets the operation status of the The mode setting and the
Mode setting switch
module. transmission rate setting
are performed with one
Sets the transmission speed
switch.
and operating status of the
Transmission speed Sets the transmission speed of The remote net mode and
module.
setting switch the module. remote I/O net mode are
specified in GX Developer
parameter settings.
Sets the operation conditions.
<Settings>
The operating conditions
• Station type
Condition setting switch - are set in the parameter
• Input data status of data link
settings of GX Developer.
faulty station
• Number of occupied stations

8 - 10
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.5 Parameter Comparisons

(1) A/AnS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Parameter name
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Newly set the parameter
with GX Developer or the
Set this parameter with the Set this parameter with GX
dedicated instruction
sequence program (TO Developer or with dedicated
Network parameter (RLPASET instruction).*1 *2
instruction) or with dedicated instruction (RLPASET
Specify [Remote net Ver.1
instruction (RLPA instruction). instruction).
mode] or [Remote I/O net
mode] for the mode.
Perform the automatic
refresh setting with GX
Developer or read/write
cyclic data with FROM/TO
Read/write cyclic data with Perform the automatic refresh
instruction.
Automatic refresh FROM/TO instruction or set setting with GX Developer or
When setting the network
parameter this parameter with dedicated read/write cyclic data with
parameter with dedicated
instruction (RRPA instruction). FROM/TO instruction.
instruction (RLPASET
instruction), read/write
cyclic data with FROM/TO
instruction.

(2) QnA/QnAS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Specifications Compat- Precautions for

Parameter name
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Newly set the parameter
with GX Developer or the
dedicated instruction
Set this parameter with GX (RLPASET instruction).*1 *2
Set this parameter with GX
Developer or with dedicated Up to 4 modules can be set
Network parameter Developer or sequence
instruction (RLPASET when setting with GX
program (TO instruction).
instruction). Developer.
Specify [Remote net Ver.1
mode] or [Remote I/O net
mode] for the mode.
Set the automatic refresh
with GX Developer or read/
write cyclic data with
Perform the automatic refresh Perform the automatic refresh FROM/TO instruction.
Automatic refresh setting with GX Developer or setting with GX Developer or When setting the network
parameter read/write cyclic data with read/write cyclic data with parameter with dedicated
FROM/TO instruction. FROM/TO instruction. instruction (RLPASET
instruction), read/write
cyclic data with FROM/TO
instruction.

*1 Parameter setting of Q series CC-Link modules

Parameters can be set on up to eight modules using GX Developer. For the settings of the 9th module or later, use the
dedicated instruction.
For details, refer to the CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual.
*2 Delete the program for the network parameter setting of the existing module.

8 - 11
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.6 Program Comparisons

8.6.1 Comparison of I/O signals

(1) A/AnS series

(a) Input signal
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Signal name Compat-

Input signal Precautions for replacement
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
Xn0 Module error Module error
Xn1 Data link status at host station Data link status at host station
Delete the sequence program of the section
Xn2 Parameter setting status Prohibited to use corresponding to the function, and check with
SB006D (Parameter setting status).
Xn3 Data link status of other station Data link status of other station
Delete the sequence program of the section
corresponding to the function.
Module reset acceptance
Xn4 Prohibited to use × When the switch setting is changed, turn the power
complete
supply of programmable controller system OFF 
ON or reset the programmable controller CPU.
Xn5 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Data link startup by buffer
Xn6 memory parameter normal
completion
Data link startup by buffer
Xn7 memory parameter error
completion
Delete the sequence program of the section
Data link startup by E2PROM corresponding to the function, and set parameters
Xn8
parameter normal completion Prohibited to use
with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
Data link startup by E2PROM (RLPASET instruction).
Xn9
parameter error completion
Parameter registration to
XnA
E2PROM normal completion
Parameter registration to
XnB
E2PROM error completion
XnC Prohibited to use Prohibited to use

E2PROM erasure normal Delete the sequence program of the section

XnD
completion corresponding to the function, and set parameters
Prohibited to use
E2PROM erasure abnormal with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
XnE (RLPASET instruction).
completion
XnF Module ready Module ready
X(n+1)0
X(n+1)1
X(n+1)2
X(n+1)3
X(n+1)4
X(n+1)5
X(n+1)6
X(n+1)7
Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
X(n+1)8
X(n+1)9
X(n+1)A
X(n+1)B
X(n+1)C
X(n+1)D
X(n+1)E
X(n+1)F

8 - 12
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(b) Output signal

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Signal name Compat-

Output signal Precautions for replacement
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
Refreshed automatically. Delete the sequence
Yn0 Refresh specification Prohibited to use program of the section corresponding to the
function.
Yn1
Yn2 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Yn3
Delete the sequence program of the section
corresponding to the function.
Yn4 Module reset request Prohibited to use × When the switch setting is changed, turn the power
supply of programmable controller system OFF 
ON or reset the programmable controller CPU.
Yn5 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Delete the sequence program of the section
Data link startup request from corresponding to the function, and set parameters
Yn6 Prohibited to use
buffer memory parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
(RLPASET instruction).
Yn7 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Delete the sequence program of the section
Data link startup request from corresponding to the function, and set parameters
Yn8 Prohibited to use
E2PROM parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
(RLPASET instruction).
Yn9 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Delete the sequence program of the section
Parameter registration request to corresponding to the function, and set parameters
YnA Prohibited to use
E2PROM with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
(RLPASET instruction).
YnB
Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
YnC
Delete the sequence program of the section
corresponding to the function, and set parameters
YnD E2PROM erasure request Prohibited to use
with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
(RLPASET instruction).
YnE
YnF
Y(n+1)0
Y(n+1)1
Y(n+1)2
Y(n+1)3
Y(n+1)4
Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Y(n+1)5
Y(n+1)6
Y(n+1)7
Y(n+1)8
Y(n+1)9
Y(n+1)A
Y(n+1)B
Y(n+1)C Bank switch specification of Bank switching is not required. (Refer to Section
Prohibited to use
Y(n+1)D buffer memory 8.6.2.)
Y(n+1)E
Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Y(n+1)F

8 - 13
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(2) QnA/QnAS series

(a) Input signal
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Signal name Compat-

Input signal Precautions for replacement
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
Xn0 Module error Module error
Data link status at host
Xn1 Data link status at host station
station
Delete the sequence program of the section
Xn2 Parameter setting status Prohibited to use corresponding to the function, and check with
SB006D (Parameter setting status).
Data link status of other
Xn3 Data link status of other station
station
Delete the sequence program of the section
corresponding to the function.
Module reset acceptance
Xn4 Prohibited to use × When the switch setting is changed, turn the power
complete
supply of programmable controller system OFF 
ON or reset the programmable controller CPU.
Xn5 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Data link startup by buffer
Xn6 memory parameter normal
completion
Data link startup by buffer
Xn7 memory parameter error
completion
Delete the sequence program of the section
Data link startup by E2PROM corresponding to the function, and set parameters
Xn8
parameter normal completion Prohibited to use
with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
Data link startup by E2PROM (RLPASET instruction).
Xn9
parameter error completion
Parameter registration to
XnA
E2PROM normal completion
Parameter registration to
XnB
E2PROM error completion
XnC Prohibited to use Prohibited to use

E2PROM erasure normal Delete the sequence program of the section

XnD
completion corresponding to the function, and set parameters
Prohibited to use
E2PROM erasure abnormal with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
XnE (RLPASET instruction).
completion
XnF Module ready Module ready
X(n+1)0
X(n+1)1
X(n+1)2
X(n+1)3
X(n+1)4
X(n+1)5
X(n+1)6
X(n+1)7
Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
X(n+1)8
X(n+1)9
X(n+1)A
X(n+1)B
X(n+1)C
X(n+1)D
X(n+1)E
X(n+1)F

8 - 14
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(b) Output signal

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Signal name Compat-

Output signal Precautions for replacement
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
Refreshed automatically. Delete the sequence
Yn0 Refresh specification Prohibited to use program of the section corresponding to the
function.
Yn1
Yn2 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Yn3
Delete the sequence program of the section
corresponding to the function.
Yn4 Module reset request Prohibited to use × When the switch setting is changed, turn the power
supply of programmable controller system OFF 
ON or reset the programmable controller CPU.
Yn5 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Delete the sequence program of the section
Data link startup request from corresponding to the function, and set parameters
Yn6 Prohibited to use
buffer memory parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
(RLPASET instruction).
Yn7 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Delete the sequence program of the section
Data link startup request from corresponding to the function, and set parameters
Yn8 Prohibited to use
E2PROM parameters with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
(RLPASET instruction).
Yn9 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Delete the sequence program of the section
Parameter registration request to corresponding to the function, and set parameters
YnA Prohibited to use
E2PROM with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
(RLPASET instruction).
YnB
Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
YnC
Delete the sequence program of the section
corresponding to the function, and set parameters
YnD E2PROM erasure request Prohibited to use
with GX Developer or with dedicated instruction
(RLPASET instruction).
YnE
YnF
Y(n+1)0
Y(n+1)1
Y(n+1)2
Y(n+1)3
Y(n+1)4
Y(n+1)5
Y(n+1)6
Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Y(n+1)7
Y(n+1)8
Y(n+1)9
Y(n+1)A
Y(n+1)B
Y(n+1)C
Y(n+1)D
Y(n+1)E
Y(n+1)F

8 - 15
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.6.2 Buffer memory comparisons

(1) A/AnS series

Buffer memory is divided into bank0 to bank2 on the A/AnS series, but it is one area on the Q series.
Bank is switched with ON/OFF of Y (n+1)C, Y(n+1)D.
Buffer memory address of the Q series is shown in parenthesis, as buffer memory addresses of
communication buffer and automatic updating buffer are different.
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Buffer memory address Buffer memory name Compat- Precautions for
Bank Hex. Dec. AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility replacement
Parameter information Parameter information
0H to 5FH 0 to 95
area area
60H to 7FH 96 to 127 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Parameter information Parameter information
80H to CDH 128 to 205
area area
Added with the remote net
Parameter information
CEH to DFH 206 to 223 Prohibited to use Ver.2 mode.
area
Replacement is not applied.
E0H to 15FH 224 to 351 Remote input (RX) Remote input (RX)

0 160H to 1DFH 352 to 479 Remote output (RY) Remote output (RY)
1E0H to 2DFH 480 to 735 Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw)
2E0H to 3DFH 736 to 991 Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWr)
Added with the remote net
Slave station offset, size
3E0H to 5DFH 992 to 1503 Prohibited to use Ver.2 mode.
information
Replacement is not applied.
5E0H to 5FFH 1504 to 1535 Link special relay (SB) Link special relay (SB)
600 H to 7FFH 1536 to 2047 Link special register (SW) Link special register (SW)
800 H to 9FFH 2048 to 2559 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
A00H to FFFH 2560 to 4095 Random access buffer Random access buffer
0 to FFFH 0 to 4095 Delete the program for bank
1 Communication buffer Communication buffer
(1000H to 1FFFH) (4096 to 8191) switching.
0 to FFFH 0 to 4095 Delete the program for bank
2 Automatic updating buffer Automatic updating buffer
(2000H to 2FFFH) (8192 to 12287) switching.
- -
- Prohibited to use -
(3000H to 3FFFH) (12288 to 16383)
- - The function was added to Q
- - Area for Ver.2
(4000H to 53FFH) (16384 to 21503) series modules.
- -
- Prohibited to use -
(5400H to 7FFFH) (21504 to 32767)

A/Ans series Q series

Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2
0H 0H 0H 0H

FFFH FFFH FFFH

Y(n+1)C : OFF Y(n+1)C : ON Y(n+1)C : OFF
Y(n+1)D : OFF Y(n+1)D : OFF Y(n+1)D : ON

2FFFH

8 - 16
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(2) QnA/QnAS series

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible
Buffer memory address Buffer memory name
Compat-
AJ61QBT11/ Precautions for replacement
Hex. Dec. QJ61BT11N ibility
A1SJ61QBT11
Parameter information Parameter information
0H to 5FH 0 to 95
area area
60H to 7FH 96 to 127 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
Parameter information Parameter information
80H to CDH 128 to 205
area area
Added with the remote net Ver.2
Parameter information
CEH to DFH 206 to 223 Prohibited to use mode.
area
Replacement is not applied.
E0H to 15FH 224 to 351 Remote input (RX) Remote input (RX)
160H to 1DFH 352 to 479 Remote output (RY) Remote output (RY)
1E0H to 2DFH 480 to 735 Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw)
2E0H to 3DFH 736 to 991 Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWr)
Added with the remote net Ver.2
Slave station offset, size
3E0H to 5DFH 992 to 1503 Prohibited to use mode.
information
Replacement is not applied.
5E0H to 5FFH 1504 to 1535 Link special relay (SB) Link special relay (SB)
600H to 7FFH 1536 to 2047 Link special register (SW) Link special register (SW)
800H to 9FFH 2048 to 2559 Prohibited to use Prohibited to use
A00H to FFFH 2560 to 4095 Random access buffer Random access buffer
1000H to 1FFFH 4096 to 8191 Communication buffer Communication buffer
2000H to 2FFFH 8192 to 12287 Automatic updating buffer Automatic updating buffer
- -
Prohibited to use -
(3000H to 3FFFH) (12288 to 16383)
- - The function was added to Q series
- Area for Ver.2
(4000H to 53FFH) (16384 to 21503) modules.
- -
Prohibited to use -
(5400H to 7FFFH) (21504 to 32767)

8 - 17
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.6.3 Comparison of link special relay (SB)/link special register (SW)

(1) A/AnS series

The following table shows SB/SW which have different application on the A series and the Q series.
(a) Link special relay (SB)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Name Compat-
Number Precautions for replacement
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
The specifications of A/AnS
Master station switching data Refresh instruction at standby
SB0001 series and Q series are the
link start master switching
same.
Refresh instruction when Use for setting network
SB0003 changing parameters by the parameters with RLPASET
dedicated instruction instruction.
Master station duplication error
SB0007
canceling request
- Transmission speed test
SB000B
request Added on the Q series and
SB000C Forced master switching replacement is not applied.
Remote device station
SB000D initialization procedure
registration instruction
Refresh instruction
Master station switch data link
SB0042 acknowledgement status at
start acceptance
standby master switching
Refresh instruction complete Added on the Q series and
Master station switch data link
SB0043 status at standby master replacement is not applied.
start complete
switching
Forced master switching
SB0046 -
executable status
Parameter setting test Parameter information read The functions of A/AnS series
SB004E
acceptance status acknowledgement status are different from those of Q
series.
Since the parameter setting test
×
Parameter setting test Parameter information read function is not required for the
SB004F
complete status completion status Q series, delete the sequence
program for the corresponding
function.
Master station duplication error
SB0057
canceling acknowledgement
Master station duplication error
SB0058
canceling complete
Master switching request
SB005A
acknowledgement
Master switching request
SB005B
complete
Forced master switching Added on the Q series and
SB005C -
request acknowledgement replacement is not applied.
Forced master switching
SB005D
request complete
Execution status of remote
SB005E device station initialization
procedure
Completion status of remote
SB005F device station initialization
procedure

8 - 18
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Name Compat-
Number Precautions for replacement
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
The mode is set on the Q series
using the network parameters.
SB0069 Module mode -
(The setting can be checked in
SW0060.)
Setting status of block
Added on the Q series and
SB006F - guarantee of cyclic data per
replacement is not applied.
station
Master station return
SB0079
specification information
Host master/standby master
SB007B
operation status
Slave station refresh/
compulsory clear setting status
SB007C
in case of programmable
controller CPU STOP Added on the Q series and
-
Standby master station test replacement is not applied.
SB00B4
result
Transmission speed test result
SB0184
for standby master station
Transmission speed test
SB0185
accept status
Transmission speed test
SB0186
completion status

8 - 19
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(b) Link special register (SW)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Name Compat-
Number Precautions for replacement
AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
Dedicated instruction retry
SW000B
count setting Added on the Q series and
-
Specification of remote device replacement is not applied.
SW0014 to SW0017
station to be initialized.
The specifications of A/AnS
Master station switch data link Refresh instruction at standby
SW0043 series and Q series are the
start result master switching result
same.
Automatic CC-Link startup
SW0052
execution result
SW0058 Detailed LED display status
SW0059 Transmission rate setting
Added on the Q series and
- Forced master switching
SW005D replacement is not applied.
instruction result
Remote device station
SW005F initialization procedure
registration instruction result
On the Q series, parameter
SW0062 Condition setting switch status Module operating status
setting status is stored.
SW00B9 E2PROM registration status
SW00BA E2PROM erasure result
No E2PROM (Refer to Section
Number of times when -
8.7.)
SW00BB parameters can be registered
to E2PROM
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0110 to SW011F registration execution
individual information (target 1
to 16)
Compatible CC-Link Ver.
SW0140 to SW0143
information
Added on the Q series and
- CC-Link Ver.
replacement is not applied.
SW0144 to SW0147 installation/parameter
matching status
SW0148 Parameter mode
SW0149 Host parameter mode
SW0183 Transmission speed test result
Transmission speed test result
SW0184 to SW0187
for each station

8 - 20
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(2) QnA/QnAS series

The following table shows SB/SW that have different applications on the QnA/QnAS series and the Q
series.
(a) Link special relay (SB)
: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Name Compat-
Number Precautions for replacement
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
The specifications of A/AnS
Master station switching data Refresh instruction at standby
SB0001 series and Q series are the
link start master switching
same.
Refresh instruction when
SB0003 changing parameters by the
dedicated instruction
Master station duplication error
SB0007
canceling request
Added on the Q series and
- Transmission speed test
SB000B replacement is not applied.
request
SB000C Forced master switching
Remote device station
SB000D initialization procedure
registration instruction
Communication command (1)
SB0030
acceptance Not used on the Q series.
Communication command (1) Delete the sequence program
SB0031
complete of the section corresponding to
-
Communication command (2) the function, and replace
SB0032
acceptance READ, WRITE instructions with
Communication command (2) RIRD, RIWT instructions.
SB0033
complete
Forced master switching
SB0046
executable status
Master station duplication error
SB0057
canceling acknowledgement
Master station duplication error
SB0058
canceling complete
Master switching request
SB005A
acknowledgement
Master switching request
SB005B
complete Added on the Q series and
-
Forced master switching replacement is not applied.
SB005C
request acknowledgement
Forced master switching
SB005D
request complete
Execution status of remote
SB005E device station initialization
procedure
Completion status of remote
SB005F device station initialization
procedure
(To next page)

8 - 21
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Name Compat-
Number Precautions for replacement
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
The mode is set on the Q series
using the network parameters.
SB0069 Module mode -
(The setting can be checked in
SW0060.)
Setting status of block
SB006F guarantee of cyclic data per
station
Master station return
SB0079
specification information
Added on the Q series and
- Host master/standby master
SB007B replacement is not applied.
operation status
Slave station refresh/
compulsory clear setting status
SB007C
in case of programmable
controller CPU STOP
RECV instruction (1) execution Not used on the Q series.
SB00A0
request flag Delete the sequence program
-
RECV instruction (2) execution of the section corresponding to
SB00A1
request flag the function.
Standby master station test
SB00B4
result
Transmission speed test result
SB0184
for standby master station Added on the Q series and
-
Transmission speed test replacement is not applied.
SB0185
accept status
Transmission speed test
SB0186
completion status

8 - 22
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

(b) Link special register (SW)

: Compatible, : Partial change required, × : Incompatible

Name Compat-
Number Precautions for replacement
AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 QJ61BT11N ibility
Dedicated instruction retry
SW000B
count setting
Specification of remote device
SW0014 to SW0017
station to be initialized.
Automatic CC-Link startup
SW0052
execution result
Added on the Q series and
SW0058 - Detailed LED display status
replacement is not applied.
SW0059 Transmission rate setting
Forced master switching
SW005D
instruction result
Remote device station
SW005F initialization procedure
registration instruction result
On the Q series, parameter
SW0062 Condition setting switch status Module operating status
setting status is stored.
SW00B9 E2PROM registration status
SW00BA E2PROM erasure result
No E2PROM (Refer to Section
Number of times when -
8.7.)
SW00BB parameters can be registered
to E2PROM
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0110 to SW011F registration execution
individual information (target 1
to 16)
Compatible CC-Link Ver.
SW0140 to SW0143
information
Added on the Q series and
- CC-Link Ver.
replacement is not applied.
SW0144 to SW0147 installation/parameter
matching status
SW0148 Parameter mode
SW0149 Host parameter mode
SW0183 Transmission speed test result
Transmission speed test result
SW0184 to SW0187
for each station

8 - 23
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.7 Other Precautions

This section describes other precautions.

(1) Peripheral device connection module

When AJ65BT-G4 type peripheral connection module is used on the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series, replace it
with AJ65BT-G4-S3 type peripheral connection module.
AJ65BT-G4 type peripheral connection module cannot be used on the Q series.

(2) Processing time

The link scan time and link refresh time differ between the A/AnS/QnA/QnAS series and the Q series.
For details on processing times, refer to the manual for the respective module.

(3) Parameter registration to E2PROM

As the Q series CC-Link system master/local module does not have E2PROM, delete the sequence
program of the section corresponding to the parameter registration to E2PROM.
On the Q series CC-Link system master/local module, set the GX Developer network parameters to
register parameters to the programmable controller CPU.

8 - 24
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.8 Parameter Setting Example

The following describes an example how to replace the system in which parameters were set using
sequence program (TO instruction) on the A/AnS series with the system in which parameters are set
using GX Developer on the Q series.
This section explains the above using the following system configuration example.
Station No.4

Station No.9
Station No.1 Station No.2 Local Station No.8
Master station Intelligent
station Remote Remote (Occupies Reserved device station
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station device station 4 stations) station (Occupies
(Occupies (Occupies (Occupies 4 stations)
1 station) 2 stations) 1 station)

8.8.1 Parameter setting example on the A/AnS series

The following shows a program example of parameter setting using the sequence program (TO
instruction).

Module Module
error ready

Number of stations
5 stations

Number of retries
5 times

Number of automatic return modules

2 modules

Number of stations
5 stations

Stop at CPU failure

Stop at
CPU failure

Reserved station specification

Station No. 8

Reserved station
specification
Station No. 8

8 - 25
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

Station
No.1 setting

Station
No.2 setting

Station
No.4 setting

Station
No.8 setting

Station
No.9 setting

Station
No.1 setting

1 scan ON Refresh
after RUN specification

Module Module
error ready

Data link
startup

Startup Data link

normal startup
completion

Startup Error
abnormal code
completion storage

Data link
startup

8 - 26
8 REPLACEMENT OF CC-LINK

8.8.2 Parameter setting example on the Q series

The following shows an example of parameter setting using GX Developer.

8 - 27
 APPENDICES

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

For external dimensions of modules shown in this handbook, refer to the user's manual for each
module.

Appendix 2 Spare parts storage

(1) The general specifications of programmable controllers are as follows. Please do not
store spare parts under a high temperature or high humidity condition, even within the
range guaranteed by the specifications.
Storage ambient temperature -20 to 75°C
Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90%, no condensation

(2) Store in a place avoiding direct sunlight.

(3) Store under a condition with no dust or corrosive gas.

(4) The capacity of the batteries (such as an A6BAT battery and an A8BAT battery) or a
lithium-coin battery (commercially available) for memory card is decreased by its self-
discharging even when it is not used. Replace it with new one in 5 years as a guideline.

(5) For a power supply module, CPU module with built-in power supply, or analog module
that uses any aluminum electrolytic capacitor, which is indicated in the table below, take
the following measures since the characteristics will be deteriorated when the
aluminum electrolytic capacitor is left un-energized for a long time.
Product Model
A1NCPU, A1NCPUP21, A1NCPUR21, A1NCPUP21-S3, A2CCPU
CPU module A2CCPUP21, A2CCPUR21, A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF
(Power supply built-in type) A2CJCPU-S3
A1SJHCPU
A61P, A61PEU, A61P-UL, A62P, A62PEU, A63P, A68P, A61RP, A67RP
Power supply module A2CJ66P
A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P
A62DA, A62DA-S1
Analog module A1S64AD, A1S68AD, A1S62DA, A1S68DAI, A1S68DAV,
A1S63ADA, A1S66ADA

App - 1
[Countermeasures for preventing aluminum electrolytic capacitor characteristics deterioration]
Apply the rated voltage to the aluminum electrolytic capacitor for several hours to activate it. Or,
rotate products at the periodic inspection (in every 1 to 2 years).

[Reference]
The life of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor, even if not used, under a normal temperature
decreases approximately at 1/4 speed of the case when it is energized.

App - 2
 Appendix 3 Related Manuals

Appendix 3.1 Replacement handbooks

(1) Transition guide

Target
No. Manual name Manual number
A (large) AnS (small)
1 MELSEC-A/QnA Series Transition Guide L08077E ×
2 MELSEC-AnS/QnAS Series Transition Guide L08236E ×

(2) Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (large type) to Q series handbook

Target
No. Manual name Manual number
A (large) AnS (small)
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series
L08043ENG ×
Handbook (Fundamentals)
1
Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q
L08219ENG ×
Series Handbook (Fundamentals)
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type) Series to Q Series
L08046ENG ×
Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules)
2
Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q
L08220ENG ×
Series Handbook (Intelligent Function Modules)
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS
3 L08048ENG
(Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Network Modules)
Transition from MELSEC-A/QnA (Large Type), AnS/QnAS
4 L08050ENG
(Small Type) Series to Q Series Handbook (Communications)
5 Transition from MELSEC-A0J2H Series to Q Series Handbook L08060ENG
Transition from MELSECNET/MINI-S3, A2C (I/O) to CC-Link
6 L08061ENG
Handbook
7 Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to CC-Link/LT Handbook L08062ENG
8 Transition from MELSEC-I/OLINK to AnyWire DB A20 Handbook L08263ENG
Transition of CPUs in MELSEC Redundant System Handbook
9 L08117ENG
(Transition from Q4ARCPU to QnPRHCPU)

(3) Transition Examples

Target
No. Manual name Manual number
A (large) AnS (small)
MELSEC-A/QnA (Large), AnS/QnAS (Small) Transition
1 L08121E
Examples

(4) Others

Target
No. Manual name Manual number
A (large) AnS (small)
1 Procedures for Replacing Positioning Module AD71 with QD75 FA-A-0060
Precautions for replacing A/QnA (large type) series CPU with
2 FA-A-0068 ×
Universal model QCPU

App - 3
Appendix 3.2 A/AnS series
No. Manual name Manual number Model code
Type MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B Data Link System
1 IB-66350 13JF70
Reference Manual
Type MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference Manual
2 IB-66440 1JE33
(PLC to PLC network)
Type MELSECNET/10 Network System (Remote I/O network)
3 SH-3509 13JE72
Reference Manual
CC-Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61BT11/
4 IB-66721 13J872
A1SJ61BT11 User's Manual

Appendix 3.3 QnA/QnAS series

No. Manual name Manual number Model code
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network System Reference
1 IB-66690 13JF78
Manual
CC-Link System Master/Local Module Type AJ61QBT11/
2 IB-66722 13J873
A1SJ61QBT11 User's Manual

Appendix 3.4 Q series

No. Manual name Manual number Model code
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
1 SH-080049 13JF92
Reference Manual(PLC to PLC network)
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
2 SH-080124 13JF96
Reference Manual(Remote I/O network)
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Remote I/O Module
3 SH-081164ENG 13JV30
Reference Manual (MELSECNET/10 Mode)
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
4 SH-080394E 13JR64
QJ61BT11N
MELSECNET,MELSECNET/B Local Station Data Link Module
5 SH-080670ENG 13JR98
User's Manual
6 MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instruction) SH-080809ENG 13JW10

App - 4
 Memo

App - 5
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product
within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service
Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at
the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing
on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and
the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair
parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which
follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the
product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions
or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by
industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA
Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and
compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
Unicode is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Unicode, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies.
In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

L(NA)08048ENG-F
 Mitsubishi Programmable Controller

New publication, effective Mar. 2016.

L(NA)08048ENG-F(1603)MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice.